TechRefGuide_

Epicor ERPMulti-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 10.0.700 Disclaimer This document is for informational purposes only and is subject to change without notice. This document and its contents, including the viewpoints, dates and functional content expressed herein are believed to be accurate as of its date of publication. However, Epicor Software Corporation makes no guarantee, representations or warranties with regard to the enclosed information and specifically disclaims any applicable implied warranties, such as fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, satisfactory quality or reasonable skill and care. As each user of Epicor software is likely to be unique in their requirements in the use of such software and their business processes, users of this document are always advised to discuss the content of this document with their Epicor account manager. All information contained herein is subject to change without notice and changes to this document since printing and other important information about the software product are made or published in release notes, and you are urged to obtain the current release notes for the software product. We welcome user comments and reserve the right to revise this publication and/or make improvements or changes to the products or programs described in this publication at any time, without notice. The usage of any Epicor software shall be pursuant to an Epicor end user license agreement and the performance of any consulting services by Epicor personnel shall be pursuant to Epicor's standard services terms and conditions. Usage of the solution(s) described in this document with other Epicor software or third party products may require the purchase of licenses for such other products. Where any software is expressed to be compliant with local laws or requirements in this document, such compliance is not a warranty and is based solely on Epicor's current understanding of such laws and requirements. All laws and requirements are subject to varying interpretations as well as to change and accordingly Epicor cannot guarantee that the software will be compliant and up to date with such changes. All statements of platform and product compatibility in this document shall be considered individually in relation to the products referred to in the relevant statement, i.e., where any Epicor software is stated to be compatible with one product and also stated to be compatible with another product, it should not be interpreted that such Epicor software is compatible with both of the products running at the same time on the same platform or environment. Additionally platform or product compatibility may require the application of Epicor or third-party updates, patches and/or service packs and Epicor has no responsibility for compatibility issues which may be caused by updates, patches and/or service packs released by third parties after the date of publication of this document. Epicor® is a registered trademark and/or trademark of Epicor Software Corporation in the United States, certain other countries and/or the EU. All other trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. Copyright © Epicor Software Corporation 2014. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the prior written consent of Epicor Software Corporation. 10.0.700 Revision: July 03, 2014 12:14 p.m. Total pages: 206 sys.ditaval Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Contents Contents Introduction..........................................................................................................................10 Purpose of This Guide....................................................................................................................................10 Intended Audience.........................................................................................................................................10 How It Is Organized.......................................................................................................................................10 Multi-Site Concepts..............................................................................................................12 Multi-Site Features.........................................................................................................................................13 Multiple Companies or Multiple Sites?...........................................................................................................15 Global Data Structure....................................................................................................................................16 Main Menu Navigation..................................................................................................................................16 Key Multi-Company Programs........................................................................................................................18 Personalization Tips........................................................................................................................................19 Activate Status Bar Options.....................................................................................................................19 Styling and Themes........................................................................................................................................20 Customization Across Companies..................................................................................................................21 Business Activity Queries (BAQs).....................................................................................................................22 Global BAQs...........................................................................................................................................22 Cross Company BAQs.............................................................................................................................22 Multi-Currency...............................................................................................................................................22 Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup.................................................................26 Verify Multi-Site Management License............................................................................................................26 Verify an External System Record...................................................................................................................26 Specify Settings for Service Bus External System......................................................................................26 Configure an External Company Record.........................................................................................................27 Verify an Interval Schedule.............................................................................................................................30 Schedule the Multi-Company Direct Server Process........................................................................................31 Verify the Task Agent Is Running....................................................................................................................32 Review Multi-Company Direct Log File...........................................................................................................32 Test the Communication................................................................................................................................33 Review Validation Errors.................................................................................................................................33 Review Automatic Data Translations..............................................................................................................34 Review Integrated Workbench.......................................................................................................................35 New Company Setup............................................................................................................36 Company Database Value..............................................................................................................................36 Create a Company Value........................................................................................................................36 Company Record...........................................................................................................................................37 Modify a New Company Record.............................................................................................................37 Site Cost IDs..................................................................................................................................................37 Create a Site Cost ID...............................................................................................................................38 Fiscal Calendars.............................................................................................................................................38 Create a Fiscal Calendar..........................................................................................................................39 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 3 Contents Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Earliest Apply Date.........................................................................................................................................40 Define The Earliest Apply Date................................................................................................................40 Multiple Currencies........................................................................................................................................41 Add a Currency......................................................................................................................................41 Create a Rate Type.................................................................................................................................42 Enter Exchange Rates..............................................................................................................................44 Define Company Rate Types...................................................................................................................45 Activate Currencies.................................................................................................................................46 Chart of Accounts..........................................................................................................................................46 Create a COA.........................................................................................................................................47 Select the COA Master...........................................................................................................................49 Define Accounts Segment Values............................................................................................................49 Generate GL Accounts............................................................................................................................50 Books............................................................................................................................................................51 Create a Book.........................................................................................................................................52 Import and Activate GL Transaction Types...............................................................................................53 GL Journal Codes...........................................................................................................................................53 Create Multi-Company Journal Codes.....................................................................................................53 GL Controls...................................................................................................................................................54 Modify the External Company GL Control Type.......................................................................................54 Create a Multi-Company GL Control.......................................................................................................55 Site Configuration..........................................................................................................................................55 CTP in a Multi-Site Environment..............................................................................................................56 Verify Default Site Information................................................................................................................56 Select a Site Cost ID................................................................................................................................58 Units of Measure...........................................................................................................................................58 Create a Unit of Measure........................................................................................................................58 Create a Unit of Measure Class...............................................................................................................59 External Companies.......................................................................................................................................60 Create an External Company..................................................................................................................60 Global Tables.................................................................................................................................................62 Define Global Tables...............................................................................................................................62 Multi-Company Direct Server Process.............................................................................................................63 Setup Multi-Company Direct Server Process............................................................................................63 Multi-Company Server Process.......................................................................................................................63 Setup Multi-Company Server Process......................................................................................................63 Initialize External Companies..........................................................................................................................64 Initialize External Company Records........................................................................................................64 Link Global Records.......................................................................................................................................65 Global Customers...................................................................................................................................65 Global Suppliers......................................................................................................................................66 Global Parts............................................................................................................................................67 Global Currencies...................................................................................................................................68 Global Currency Rate Types....................................................................................................................69 Global GL Accounts................................................................................................................................70 4 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 .........................................................................................................................................................................................97 Source and Target Books........................................0..........87 Multi-Company Journals ............................Setup....................................................................Setup.....82 Transaction Details.......................................................................................102 Intermediate Book..........................................................................................................................79 Central AP Invoice Payment...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................80 Central AP Invoice Payment .........................................Setup.................................................................................95 Process Flow....80 Central AP Invoice Payment .....95 Setup Process Steps.....93 Multi-Company AP Allocations ......................................................Process........72 Inter-Company Trading..............................................................................111 Create a Global BAQ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................106 Import Consolidation From Subsidiary...............................................................................................................................82 Consolidated Purchasing......110 Integrated Table Workbench.........................................................................................................................98 Currency Rate Type................................................................104 Consolidation Processing.........................Setup................................................................77 AP Invoice Automation..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................111 Multi-Company Log..............Process............................................109 System Monitor................................Setup................................90 Multi-Company AP Allocations.......................................................................83 Consolidated Purchasing ..............................................Setup............................................111 Global Dashboards and Reports........................................................................103 Consolidation Definition.............................................................................................................Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Contents Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes........................................................................................................................94 Multi-Company Consolidation......83 Consolidated Purchasing ...........................................108 Consolidated Year End Process...........99 Consolidation Rate Type...........................................................................79 AP Invoice Automation ...............................................................................................................101 Consolidation Type..............................................74 Inter-Company Purchase Orders ....................................108 Troubleshooting..........................................................................72 Global Customer Credit..............109 Automatic Transaction Reversal....................................................................................................81 Tracking and Reporting..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................700 5 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................74 Inter-Company Purchase Orders ..........................................................................................................................................................................74 Inter-Company Purchase Orders..........................89 Multi-Company Journals ............................................................Process..........................................................................................97 Source and Target External Companies.........................................................72 Global Customer Credit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................106 Consolidate to Parent..........................................................................................................................Process........................................................................Process...........................................................Setup...........................111 Epicor ERP | 10.....86 Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations.............................................................................93 Multi-Company AP Allocations ........................87 Multi-Company Journals............................................................ ....................................................................................................116 Monitor Data Flow..........................................................................................................................................................................................................Process.......................................................................................................127 Example(s)..................................................................117 Global Record Translations ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................123 Terms Maintenance........................................................................................................................................0............................118 Fixing Incoming Record Errors...............................................................................................................113 Create a User Account.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................130 Logic/Algorithms..........116 Review Multi-Company Server Log..............................125 Example(s)........................................................................................................................................................................124 Programs and Their Modifiers.................................................................................................125 Program Location and Modifiers....................................................131 Buyer Maintenance..............................122 Example(s).............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................112 Multi-Company Dashboards....................115 Configurator in a Multi-Company Enterprise..113 Create the External Company..................120 Logic/Algorithms....................................................................................................................700 ..................123 Example(s)............................................................................................................123 Logic/Algorithms..............................................................Contents Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Build a Global Dashboard.......................................................112 Build a Global Report.....................................................................118 Fixing Incoming Record Errors .................................................................................128 Business Activity Query Designer............................................................................................................................................................125 Book Maintenance...............................................................................................122 Programs and Their Modifiers.........132 Logic/Algorithms.............................................................................................................119 Primary Components...............................................................................................122 Purchasing Terms Maintenance................Process......................................................................................134 Example(s)................126 Logic/Algorithms..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................114 Create a Cross Company BAQ.........115 Build a Multi-Company Dashboard............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................134 Chart of Account Structure Maintenance........................................................117 Global Record Translations........................................................................................116 Troubleshooting Tools.........................................................................................................................................................................................................134 6 Epicor ERP | 10.............125 Logic/Algorithms...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................120 Account Segment Values............133 Logic/Algorithms..131 Programs and Their Modifiers..................................................................................................................................129 Programs and Their Modifiers..........132 Chart of Accounts Mapping...................................................................................................................................................................132 Program Location and Modifiers.....................................................116 Review Multi-Company Direct Server Log...............120 Programs and Their Modifiers.........................................................132 Example(s)................................................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................150 Program Location and Modifiers...................................136 Logic/Algorithms............................................................................................................................................................................................136 Example(s)......................158 Program Location and Modifiers...............................................................................................................................................................152 Logic/Algorithms.............................................................................................................................................157 Example(s)........156 Program Location and Modifiers..............145 Logic/Algorithms...........................................................................150 Logic/Algorithms.............................151 General Ledger Account Maintenance...147 Programs and Their Modifiers..................................................................148 Example(s)....................................139 Logic/Algorithms.............................................................................700 7 .146 Earliest Apply Date Entry....149 Fiscal Calendar Maintenance.....154 Programs and Their Modifiers...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................158 Epicor ERP | 10.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................137 COA Category Maintenance..................................................................143 Customer Maintenance.....................146 Example(s).................................................................................................................................................................................................................143 Example(s)...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................148 Exchange Rate Entry......156 GL Control Maintenance......................................................................................156 Example(s)...........................140 Example(s)..................................................................................................................148 Programs and Their Modifiers.......................................................................................138 Example(s)....................................................................................................................................................157 GL Control Type Maintenance...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................157 Logic/Algorithms............................................................................Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Contents Programs and Their Modifiers........................................................................................................141 Currency Master Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................................148 Logic/Algorithms...............................................................................................................139 Programs and Their Modifiers...................144 Programs and Their Modifiers..............138 Logic/Algorithms........................149 Example(s)....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0..................................................................................................................................................................................139 Company Configuration.....................................................................................................................151 Program Location and Modifiers.....................................................................................................147 Logic/Algorithms................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................137 Program Location and Modifiers..................................................................................................................................................................................153 GL COA Reference Type......................................................142 Logic/Algorithms...............................................................................................151 Example(s)...................................................................................................................................153 Example(s)...................155 Logic/Algorithms...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................141 Programs and Their Modifiers........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................163 Part Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................................................................160 Logic/Algorithms......................................................................178 Example(s)......................................................................................................................................................................................................180 Change PO Suggestions......165 Logic/Algorithms.............................................182 Process Use........167 Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................700 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Contents Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Logic/Algorithms..............................................173 Example(s)...........................................................................................................................................................................173 Site Maintenance...................................................................................177 Example(s).......................................................................................175 Supplier Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................172 Logic/Algorithms..............................................................................................................................167 Programs and Their Modifiers.............................................................................................178 Programs and Their Modifiers................................................................................................................181 Consolidate to Parent Entry.............................................................................................................................161 Journal Code Maintenance.............................................................................................178 Logic/Algorithms...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................170 Example(s)..............................................................174 Programs and Their Modifiers............................176 Logic/Algorithms.............182 Consolidated Year End Process.....165 Programs and Their Modifiers.............161 Example(s)....................................................................................................................................................................................................181 Process Use..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................175 Programs and Their Modifiers.....................................................164 Rate Type Maintenance..........174 Example(s)......................171 Site Cost ID Maintenance....182 8 Epicor ERP | 10..164 Example(s)...159 GL Transaction Type Maintenance.................................................................................................................180 Automatic Transaction Reversal..............................................................................161 Program Location and Modifiers.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................159 Example(s)..............179 Process Components........................................................................................................................177 User Account Security Maintenance.................................................................................163 Programs and Their Modifiers..............................................................................................164 Logic/Algorithms..........................162 Logic/Algorithms...........................................................................................................................................171 Programs and Their Modifiers...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................159 Program Location and Modifiers....................................166 Example(s)..........................................0................180 Process Use............162 Example(s)........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................170 Logic/Algorithms................................................................. ....................................................................................................................194 Process Use.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................187 Process Use.......................186 External Company Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................................202 Epicor ERP | 10.....................................................................Setup...............................196 Inter-Company Trading Scenario ................................................183 Consolidation Definition Maintenance..........................................................................193 Process Use..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................191 Process Use...................................................................................................Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Contents Process Use....................................................................199 Consolidation Scenario .............................................................................................................194 Process Use..190 Incoming Linked PO Suggestions.......................................................192 Process Use.............................................................................................................187 Generate Purchasing Suggestions................................................191 Integrated Table Workbench............................................................................................Process..........................................................................................................................................................................................189 Process Use.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................190 Process Use..196 Inter-Company Trading Scenario ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................192 Process Use................................................................Setup.....................................184 Process Use............................................................192 Multi-Company Direct Server Process...0.......................................................................................................................................................189 Global Table Maintenance................................196 Intercompany Scenario............................................................184 Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Process.....................................................185 Consolidation Type Maintenance......................................................198 Consolidation Scenario.........................................................................................................................................................................................195 Multi-Site Functionality in Action...............................................................................................................................................................................................700 9 ............................193 Multi-Company Server Process..............193 New PO Suggestions..............................................................................................................................................................................................................199 Consolidation Scenario ............................................186 Process Use...183 Process Use........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................190 Import Consolidation From Subsidiary.............................................194 Send ICPO Suggestions..............................................................................................................185 Process Use...186 External System Maintenance.....................................................188 Process Use............................................................................................................................................................................................. Use this guide to learn how to install.0. set up a new company and how to use primary and process components to set up the multi-site functionality with your Epicor application. 10 Epicor ERP | 10.Documents how you configure the multi-site functionality to run within the Epicor application. How It Is Organized The first sections of this guide primarily explain how to set up the multi-site functionalitya new company. set up. Use these options to customize the application to best fit your organization. It is also intended for financial users responsible for running the multi-company processesthe company.700 . Use this guide to learn how to set up a new company and how to use primary and process components within your Epicor Express application. Leverage this functionality to maximize your return on investment with the Epicor application. Company configuration defines options for your company in Epicor Express. The following are the main sections of this guide: • Multi-Site Concepts -. Intended Audience This guide is for individuals within your organization responsible or partially responsible for setting up the multi-site data flow between companies. ensuring a uniform set of data is available within all your companies. and the multi-company consolidation process can combine the financial results for each period into a target book in a parent company. Each company can also contain multiple financial books. This guide contains complete information on how you set up and then run these processes on a regular basis. and the last section documents the primary and process components utilized in this suite of functionality. Review these topics to learn the basic fundamentals of these features. You can set up central payments and consolidated purchases to coordinate these processes throughout the organization. You can use this module to create global records. It also contains troubleshooting tips which can help you correct any issues which may occur. The Company Setup Technical Reference Guide explores the company setup functionality. The Multi-Site Management license contains a wide range of processes which your large organization can leverage to improve the flow of data between parent and subsidiary companies.Introduction Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Introduction Purpose of This Guide The Multi-Site Technical Reference Guide explores the entire multi-site functionality suite. You need to follow these steps on each Epicor workstation.Documents the primary functionality of your multi-site environment. The middle section describes each multi-site process in detailthe primary components. and run all the multi-company processes available with your Epicor application. • Multi-Site Functionality Setup -. • Multi-Site Processes -.Describes the primary components you use to set up the multi-site functionality.Documents the various maintenance records you need to define in order to create a multi-company environment. Items like books. Epicor ERP | 10. • Primary Components -. and sites are described in this section. and global tables are described in this section.detailing what they do and the steps you follow in order to run them.This section documents the processes themselves -. Items like consolidation types.700 11 .Details the process components you use to set up the multi-site functionality. • Multi-Site Functionality in Action -. external companies. GL controls.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Introduction • New Company Setup -. • Process Components -. exchange rates.This section contains case studies which demonstrate various multi-site functions in action. Use this section as a guide to help you implement these functions into the workflow of your organization.0. Leverage these features to share global master records like customers. an organisation may comprise a combination of multiple companies on one database. 2. Use this functionality when you have multiple production centers within a company. The rest of the topics in this section are intended to be a starting point for your multi-company implementation. Multi-Company Direct -. and other internal data sharing activities.A multi-site environment consists of separate site (manufacturing facility) records maintained within a single company. coordinate purchasing between your divisions. inventory quantities. as well as other companies on separate databases. 3. It also details some key multi-site functionality you will most likely use. you define the server connections you need to pass data between each company within the separate databases. you will also need the Service Bus adapter to move records between these sites.Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts This section of the guide documents the primary functionality of your multi-company/multi-site environment. Review these topics to learn the basic fundamentals of these features. Multi-Site -. You can then leverage the multi-company processes. Through this direct method. the functionality writes multi-company data to an outbound table within the sending company and then this data is passed to the inbound table within the receiving company. You install the Windows Azure™ Service Bus adapter to move global records and other data between companies. passing data between the two databases. You will implement this functionality to match the internal structure and needs of your organization.A multi-company environment with companies on separate databases. parts. Multi-Company (Service Bus) -. This functionality has essentially three levels of database interaction: 1. In this case. The rest of these topics describe the overall multi-company functionality available. You can directly connect the companies without Service Bus. Note In some real-life setups. if the sites reside within companies on separate databases. consolidate financial data. However.700 . and scheduling parameters it requires to produce parts. and suppliers.A multi-company environment consisting of separate company records maintained within a single Epicor database. Like the Multi-Company environment. Each database can integrate data with the other databases. each site record defines the costing methods.0. Implement the features that you need to better coordinate the diverse activities of your entire organization. Within External Company Maintenance. but data sharing most likely occurs within each database before it is sent to other Epicor databases. you directly connect sites and then pass data between the outbound and inbound tables. You still must enter information on external company records through External Company Maintenance and External Company Configuration. it is normal to run Multi-Company (Service Bus) between the companies in separate databases. 12 Epicor ERP | 10. The multi-site functionality encompasses all the features which share data across different areas within your organization. the Service Bus adapter is not required. The first topics describe what considerations you need to make during the planning stage. In this environment. It contains tips on how you can visualize the various companies and sites within your organization on the interface. and Multi-Company Direct between the companies within the same database. as payments are received. sales orders. When an update is entered on the global record. Then define the other receiving. after this.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Features The multi-company/multi-site functionality contains a suite of features designed to fit the unique needs of your organization. You do this by indicating that a master record is a global parent record. the customer record is placed on credit hold.0. ensuring that the same data is used by invoices. AP Invoice Automation You can automate creating AP invoices for an inter-company trading transaction. Master records you can define as global: • Customers • Suppliers • Parts • Currencies (Note that only the initial record can be linked. each currency record must be updated manually) • Currency Rate Types • GL Accounts Global Customer Credit Use the Global Customer Credit functionality to create and enforce a credit limit for a specific customer for all companies within your organization. are then always synchronized across the database. An AP invoice is automatically created for the purchasing company and an AR invoice is automatically created for the selling company. the credit limit reaches zero or lower. Other child companies within your database can then link to this global record. the amount on each AR invoice is subtracted from the available amount. it automatically updates within all the child companies which link to it. You can apply credit limits for global customer records. Consolidated Purchasing Consolidated purchasing centralizes purchasing and AP functions across multiple companies. and other entry records. Use this functionality to define a company and the central purchasing. called global records. As AR invoices are created against the global customer record. Inter-Company Purchase Orders You can create Inter-Company Purchase Orders (ICPOs) and suggestions between multiple companies within your database. or parent company. Whenever a user tries to create a new sales order for the global customer. companies who will receive purchase order releases from the parent company. Epicor ERP | 10. or child. You do this by setting up your companies as customer and supplier records and then linking them through external company records. Global Records You can indicate that you want specific master records shared across your multi-company environment. This topic provides you with an overview of the entire suite of available multi-site functionality. packing slips. These master records. these amounts are added to the credit amount.700 13 . a credit hold warning message displays and the user cannot create the sales order. If at any point. Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide When the child companies receive the purchased parts. This is a typical business scenario that can be automated using the multi-company configuration functions: • A multi-national enterprise based in the United States has several domestic and foreign Sales companies. Multi-Company Configurator The Epicor application provides several sophisticated functions that allow you to manage configured parts in a multi-company enterprise. You can design this process to match the internal structure of your organization. or multiple child companies to a single parent company. 14 Epicor ERP | 10. export these BAQs. • The enterprise sells configured items that are designated as manufactured parts in the Manufacturing companies. and one or more domestic or foreign Manufacturing companies. as well as keep your organization's financial reporting both current and accurate. Central AP Invoice Payments Your organization can use the Central AP Invoice Payment functionality to pay for subsidiary AP invoices at the corporate (parent) level. or a multiple child companies to multiple parent companies. These functions automate business situations in which a Sales company configures and sells products that are designed and manufactured in another company. Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations Use the Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations functionality to distribute amounts from a parent company to one or more subsidiary (child) companies. These companies can be located within the same database. You can set up multi-company journals to distribute amounts from a GL journal in the parent company to specific journals within one or more child companies. they create a receipt record. or can be located in separate external databases. This flexibility gives you the power to set up your financial system to meet the legal requirements of other localities in which you do business. Multi-Company Dashboards Create multi-company dashboards which can review data from multiple companies through global business activity queries. You then distribute these allocations during the posting process. Multi-Company Consolidation The Multi-Company Consolidation Process pulls together. or business activity queries (BAQs). This AP invoice is then sent to the various receiving companies for payment. and reside only in the Manufacturing company database. or consolidates. • The enterprise maintains the configurations in one of the Manufacturing companies.700 . The corporate parent then has greater control over the AP process throughout your organization. You can create custom views. the fiscal books of one or more child companies within a parent company. these defined configurations are then used by the Sales companies when they receive customer orders for the items. This record is sent to the central purchasing company. The consolidation relationship can be a single child company to a single parent company. and designated as purchased parts in the Sales companies. Use these dashboards to review the data you need to see within another company. • The Manufacturing company then builds configured products based on the configuration sales information received from the Sales company for the ordered item. You do this by setting up multi-company GL accounts and then GL account allocations. which generates an AP invoice for the receipt. and the manufacturing (method) rules that have been defined in. as all AP invoices flow through the main (parent) company.0. Note Refer to the Configurator Technical Reference Guide for detailed information. of the data. and then display then with a custom dashboard. you create a third parent company. Use this program to define the various planning. The parent company then contains the primary book for the organization and all the child companies consolidate their financial results into it -. the site defines the overall scheduling parameters. These modules are the same as the modules available within the original company installed with your Epicor application. Example One profit center in your company manufactures pencils in Canada and another profit center manufacture markers in China. and inventory processes.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts Multiple Companies or Multiple Sites? Before you begin implementing the Multi-Site license functionality. In order to consolidate the financial results from both companies. a separate set of modules are also available. costing methods. Tip By default. Because of this.0. When you expand the node. each company has one main site. Each company can have its own set of fiscal calendars. and ASSBLY sites. In order to better compare the income received from pencils and markers and to handle the currency conversion between them. Epicor ERP | 10. Does your company need to be set up with a series of separate companies. The companies can then post financial transactions in their main currency using a unique fiscal calendar. Example Your company manufactures pencils. Another site manufactures the erasers for the ends of each pencil. This program sets up the primary company values within the database. and then packs the lead inside each pencil. Then a third site attaches the erasers to each pencil body. ERASER. Each site manufactures a specific series of products. you set up these profit centers as separate companies within the Epicor application. You should create separate companies to identify the different divisions which make up your organizational structure. and transfer parameters required for the site. For more information on creating and setting up a new company. used for these products. They also define how inventory is controlled between the sites and the parts are costed through the available costing methods. and financial books. Typically you set up companies to define various child profit center companies and a main parent company. you must consider how you should best leverage this functionality within your organization. They primarily define how a manufacturing center schedules the jobs for the various products produced by a company. You create sites through two maintenance programs. You create new companies by using the Epicor Administration Console. the next time you launch the Epicor application. or a combination of both companies and sites? Companies and sites represent different types of business activity. drills the hole for the lead. but others can be added as needed. You then further define how each site interacts with various modules and its various warehouses within Site Configuration Control. review the New Company Setup section. You can then consolidate the results from each child company into the main book within the parent company. separate sites. Companies identify the top levels of financial activity across the organization. but you can create more companies as required. You enter the primary site record through Site Maintenance. you create the WOOD.700 15 . but then convert these amounts using different currencies and fiscal calendars in separate books. At a minimum. Both site Maintenance and Site Configuration Control are discussed later within the Primary Components section.using their consolidation books to convert the final values using the organization's base currency. each child company contains at least a main book and a consolidation book. Tip The New Company Setup section describes when you add and configure new sites within your company. the new company displays as a separate node on the Main Menu. Sites identify various areas of production within a company. your Epicor application installs with one company. currencies. One site shapes the wood required for each pencil. By default. costing. In order to define the production schedules. like the Production Calendar and the Production Prep Time. The modules which are available depend on the licenses your organization purchases from Epicor. Once your organization purchases a multi-site license. you are ready to begin implementing this structure in your database. Once this flow chart is complete. Some primary questions you can ask include: • In how many currencies does your organization conduct business? • What primary master records. you can begin implementing this structure within a test environment to ensure this multi-site structure plan will work. you can also add additional sites as you need within each company. Are you primarily a manufacturing organization which builds parts in different countries? Are you a complex organization with several profit centers for items like financial services. create a flow chart to clarify how these various areas of the organization will interact with each other. Main Menu Navigation The Main Menu contains some additional features in a multi-company environment.700 . Use the tree view to navigate around the various companies and sites defined within your organization. suppliers. and parts. do I need to share across companies? • What different chart of accounts structures do you need to satisfy the legal requirements in different countries? • How many financial books need to be created for posting general ledger transactions and consolidating general ledgers across multiple companies? The needs of your multi-site environment determine the records you enter. and direct product sales. Your set up process depends on the records you identify as being required across part or all of your organization.0. Global Data Structure When you determine the companies and sites you need in your multi-site environment. support. The following screen capture illustrates how the multi-company environment displays on the Main Menu: 16 Epicor ERP | 10. Be sure to review the suites of modules available from Epicor and purchase the licenses you need to install and activate these modules.Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Before you begin implementing the multi-site functionality. you next must decide what records you need to set up and share across the various companies and sites. Consider the kinds of records you need to define. determine the various business areas within your organization. In turn. After you define these records. It displays all of the companies and their multiple sites through the tree view. as well as which global records need to be linked between companies. Can you better track this area of the business through a site or a company? Once you decide on the company and site structure your organization requires. you will structure and enter records required to handle the day to day business and quarterly/annual reporting needs of your multi-site environment. and each of these profit centers have separate international locations? Do you have separate divisions you need to consolidate within a larger branch division. and in turn these larger divisions need to consolidate within the parent organization? Depending upon these needs. install the Epicor application. You can the additional companies you need within each database. Once you have determined which modules you need. You are then ready to begin setting up the multi-site environment for your organization. The records you will enter depend upon the locations in which you conduct business and the overall financial reporting structure within your organization. like customers. you can begin adding the companies and sites you need. Each company or site will contain an identical set of modules to ensure that the Epicor application contains identical functionality throughout your organization. you can make a change in the parent instance of a global record and the changes update all of its linked instances in other companies and sites. however. If you need. each site contains a separate set of modules as well. so all of its modules display at the root level. These global records can then link across companies and sites. When you expand these nodes. In the example above. Erp. GL Control Maintenance). If you choose.-. you can also create multiple sites within each company. When you expand a site node.0.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts The various companies within this organization display as the primary nodes on the tree view. Paul. and Erp. The Epicor Mpls site.St. however.. contains three sites -. like companies. notice the main Epicor Corporation company does not have any sites. notice they contain a separate set of modules. When you expand each of these nodes. these links all connect to a parent record.700 17 .Main Site. notice that. You can. Paul companies are the main nodes. indicate that some maintenance (or master) records are shared across the organization.Mpls Site. and separate instances of this program display on your screen. The values you enter in each company or site are typically unique. These sites make up a second level of hierarchy within the multi-site interface. Epicor Mpls. You can launch the same program within multiple companies or sites (for example.St. Epicor ERP | 10.. and Erp. The Epicor Corporation. a separate set of modules displays under each site node. review the available Microsoft® Documentation found at: http://msdn. defining the suppliers and customers involved in this trading relationship. You can also correct issues which occur using the Integrated Table Workbench. However to move data between companies and sites in a multi-site environment. and so on for each record. You match a field that exists in the external company record with an equivalent field within the current company. If your environment will move data between companies and sites within the same database. or Multi-Company).microsoft.Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Key Multi-Company Programs You set up the multi-company environment within each company or site using the External System Integration setup programs.700 . External System Maintenance Use External System Maintenance to add or update the integration records you use to transfer data between multiple companies. you create an external system that uses a DIRECT transfer method. Before you can set up companies within External Company Maintenance.microsoft. you first indicate which external system you use to interact with the external company (for example Multi-Company Direct. Tip For more info on Windows Azure™ Service Bus. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration 18 Epicor ERP | 10. If you are using the Service Bus external system.aspx To learn how to build the compose Service Bus connection strings. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance External Company Configuration Use External Company Configuration to define the specific types of interactions you want to occur between the two companies -. Data between these two fields is synchronized so that the global record updates the linked child record as expected. This topic briefly describes each program.aspx Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance External Company Maintenance Use External Company Maintenance to establish relationships with other companies within the database and external applications such as Supplier Connect. Then you must create an external company record within this program for each company with which you want the current company to interact. More details about each multi-company program are described in later sections of this guide. These matches. Use this sheet to correct situations where the field structure does not match between global records. enter connection details in the Service Bus Connection fields. you must set up an external system which uses the Windows Azure™ Service Bus adapter. editing. supplier data.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj656647. You then indicate what data the external system can receive from other companies and sites in the external database(s). This program is the first setup program you use within a company or site to begin setting up the multi-company functionality. then display on the Translations List for review. PO suggestions. and if needed. You also set up the Inter-Company Trading functionality in this program.0. or translations.like sending customer data. review the documentation found at: http://msdn.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj149830. Another key feature within this program is the Translations sheet. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Once you define the options you need. 3. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • System Setup > External System Integration > Integrated Table Workbench Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Navigate to the Global Options tab. Global Table Maintenance Use Global Table Maintenance to specify which fields update when global records are pulled into your current company. Launch a program from within a specific company or site. This bar is located at the bottom of each window. Use this program to define which global fields are linked to records within child companies when you integrate data from a company which contains the parent global records. Click on the Tools menu and select Options. To do this you activate some functionality on the Options window. 1. all the programs you launch within this company or site reflect this change. You can personalize the status bar on each program to clarify both the company and the site from which the program was launched. The Options window displays. Epicor ERP | 10. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Global Table • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Global Table • System Setup > External System Integration > Global Table Integrated Tables Workbench Use the Integrated Table Workbench to manually correct records coming into the system from external integration systems. it can get confusing to remember which program is open for which company or site. Personalization Tips Because you can have instances of the same program open across companies and sites at the same time. Activate Status Bar Options You can display both the current company and site on the status bar.0. This program is a key tool for resolving minor issues as they occur when multiple records move between companies. This window defines options across all the programs contained within a company or site. Records which display in this workbench contain errors which need to be corrected. 2.700 19 . You can change the overall colors used by each window. you access it from the Main Menu by clicking the Options menu and highlighting the Styling sub-menu.0. In the Status Bar Panels area. You can also modify the look of text. users can instantly differentiate between the companies within your database. Click OK. The styling functionality is installed with your Epicor application. and your parent company is in Ireland. Styling and Themes You can further identify different companies through the styling and themes functionality. and even the states of specific controls. 5. Tanzania. Leverage this functionality to give each of your companies a distinct look and feel that helps users immediately identify which company they are in. The Options window closes. You launch the various styling programs from this sub-menu. Notice that the status bar for the program now displays the company and/or the site from which you launched the program. field colors. Example Your organization has facilities in Finland.Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 4. select the Company check box. buttons. Tip The check boxes you select depend upon the multi-site structure you need. or both check boxes. You can then review the status bar for each program to find out from which company or site you launched the program. Repeat these steps with each company and/or site.700 . For example. By creating distinct styles for each company within your database. if you only use multiple companies. just select the Company check box. You then use the styling functionality to create a unique look for each location. You decide to use the colors of each country's flag 20 Epicor ERP | 10. and Brazil. the Site check box. You create separate companies for each location within the database. You can leverage the styling and themes functionality to change visual aspects of all program interfaces within a company. This hard copy. available for purchase from Epicor. this indicates you can display this customization across all companies within your database. Customization Across Companies You can customize each program within the Epicor application to match a specific business need required by your organization and companies. To activate these rights.0. buttons. To learn how to use this functionality.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts as the background colors for the programs within each specific company. You can also use the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide. You then launch Theme Maintenance in each company to import the specific theme you need for the country. and so on to a program so that it addresses some requirement for your business. full color book. a country. The styling and themes tools contain a large set of functionality. launch the application help and expand the Application Tools node. you first switch the program to Developer Mode. You can even create custom code which activates under specific conditions. expand this node to review the help topics. full color book. This functionality is available to any user assigned rights within User Account Maintenance. you export these themes. or any other need not reflected in the default installation. To learn how to use this functionality. You can also use the Epicor ICE User Experience and Customization Guide. To activate these rights. The next time users log into the Epicor application.700 21 . When you indicate this customization is the default for the program. and select the Customize Privileges check box. The Customization node displays. The customization tools contain a large set of functionality. You then launch Menu Maintenance from within each company and select your customized program from the Customization drop-down list. The styling and themes functionality is available to any user assigned rights within User Account Maintenance. sheets. This hard copy. In order to create a customized program you can use across companies. Using Theme Maintenance. When you save your customization. launch the application help and expand the Application Tools node. each set of company modules display using the country flag theme you created and defined. has a series of customization chapters which visually guide you through using this functionality. find and select the user account for which you want to assign rights. the next time users log into the company the customized version displays. expand this node to review the help topics. select the All Companies check box. and documenting them here is beyond the scope of this technical reference guide. legal compliance. available for purchase from Epicor. and documenting them here is beyond the scope of this technical reference guide. The Styling and Themes Overview node displays. find and select the user account for which you want to assign rights and select the Can Maintain Themes check box. The Customization functionality is a powerful set of tools you can leverage to add new programs or modify every program within the application. You can then make this customization available to all companies. use this window to modify the interface as you need. has a Styling and Themes chapter which visually guides you through using this functionality. Epicor ERP | 10. You can then launch the Customization Tools Dialog window. Use this functionality to add fields. ensuring that your monetary amounts on all your transactions are up to date. navigate to the General tab. incorporate them within an executive dashboard. The multi-currency functionality affects transactions throughout the entire application. Each business activity query can be designed to pull in and display data from different areas of the database. Navigate to the General tab and select the Cross Company check box. you build a Cross-Company BAQ.Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Business Activity Queries (BAQs) Business Activity Queries (BAQs) are personalized views of data that typically display information from a single company. When you are in a program that uses queries. After you finish creating the query and save it. You can also use the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide. and you can create a cross-company BAQ that displays data from multiple companies at the same time. and documenting all the features here is beyond the scope of this technical reference guide. This user guide contains a series BAQ chapters that contain step-by-step illustrated examples for creating and implementing custom queries. it will pull in and display data from multiple companies within your organization. You then use them as base queries for a dashboard. When you create a new BAQ that will display data from multiple companies. To learn more details. use them to generate a BAQ report. Use global BAQs to display data through consistent. You can then add this BAQ to a dashboard or a report in other companies to view data through the same query. Cross Company BAQs If you wish to display data from multiple companies at the same time. Tip This toolset contains a large set of functionality. identical views across companies within your organization. launch the application help and expand the System Management > Business Activity Queries node. you indicate it is a global business activity query definition. A Cross-Company BAQ can display data results for all companies for which the current user has security access. Navigate to the company where you wish to use it. When you create a new BAQ you wish to make available to other companies. you also do this within the Business Activity Query Designer. this global BAQ displays as a query option. Global BAQs You can indicate a BAQ is global. To do this within the Business Activity Query Designer. Now when you use this query on a dashboard or BAQ report. Select the Global check box. Multi-Currency You use the multi-currency functionality to enter and maintain the currencies through which each company in your database does business. As exchange rates between currencies change (as often as daily). which means this query is available for use in other companies. active exchange rates. This section focuses on the multi-company features available for business activity queries. and access them in BAQ searches. However you can create a global BAQ for use in other companies. Similar to a global query. this global query can be selected in other companies. like the Dashboard or the BAQ Report Designer. you indicate it is a cross company business activity query.0. your transactions can be automatically revalued using the current. 22 Epicor ERP | 10. this query must use the same name across all companies. Use BAQs to display a specific set of data you need. To work properly.700 . Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts To do this, you can lock in the exchange rates on specific records. These records then ignore exchange rate fluctuations and maintain the original conversion amounts for all transactions linked to them. Currency Types The application organizes currencies through different types. Available types: • Transactional- A currency used on a specific document, or record, in order to conduct business on that record. Transactional currencies are used for records created for external transactions with customers and suppliers, and internal transactions with sites and companies within your organization. A transactional currency is also called a Document currency; you can have as many document currencies as you need for the localities in which you conduct business. • Reporting- A currency your company uses to store, or report, amounts for financial reports. These currencies are used to calculate the final income and expense amounts generated by the business of a specific company. These amounts are officially expressed through a reporting currency. You can have up to three reporting currencies for each company. • Base- The primary currency used by a company. Technically this currency is also considered a reporting currency by the application as well (you may see documentation which refers to each company having four currencies). The base currency is unique, however, as it is the default currency used on all transactions generated within a specific company. When the application cannot find another currency to use for a transaction, it calculates the amounts using the base currency defined for the company. You can enter as many transactional currencies as you need. Each company, however, can only have four reporting currencies (including the base currency). Business transactions are recorded in all four reporting currencies. Use these currencies in published reports and financial documents. If your organization conducts business in other countries, you run quarterly and annual reports in the base and reporting currencies, displaying financial results with the correct currency values. Reporting currency conversion is available in all modules except Fixed Assets, Payroll, and Inventory. For these modules, however, a currency conversion may happen if the book currency is different from the base currency for the company. In this case, a conversion does run using the current exchange rate for the currency and its defined rounding tolerances. As a result, a rounding difference may occur in this situation, and a balancing amount is generated within the rounding difference account. Tip Currency conversions do not happen in the posting engine if the business transaction is recorded in all of the reporting currencies. Currency Selection The application locates the specific currency to use on a transaction through a hierarchical structure. It selects the currency to use depending on the position of the record within the hierarchy. Records lower within the hierarchy override records in a higher position. Think of the currency hierarchy as a tree, with a primary default currency at the top and overriding currencies defined on each large branch and then subsequently smaller branch on this tree. The primary currency used as the default by the application is the base currency. If another currency is selected on a maintenance record, like a book or country, this currency is used instead of the base currency. Likewise, if another currency is selected on a specific record, like a sales order, this currency overrides the currency defined on the maintenance record. The currency hierarchy: 1. The base currency defined on the company record (Company Configuration). 2. The currency selected on higher level maintenance records overrides the base currency. If a currency is selected on a book or a country record, this currency is used for all records linked to the book or country. Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 23 Multi-Site Concepts Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 3. If a currency is selected on lower level maintenance records, however, it overrides the currency defined on the higher level maintenance record. Any currencies selected on customer, supplier, or bank account records are used instead to calculate amounts. 4. Lastly, if a currency or rate type is selected on a specific transactional record, like a sales order or an AP invoice, this currency or rate type is used to calculate the amounts on the transactional record. You can leverage this hierarchy to manage currencies through a method that best fits how your company conducts business. Use the currency hierarchy to select the currencies you need overall, but then modify these default currencies for any unique business situation that may occur. Manage Exchange Rates Exchange rates are used by the application to calculate converted amounts from the source currency to the target currency. If you need, you can update exchange rates on a daily basis. You set up the multi-currency functionality by creating currencies and rate types and then defining where these records are used on customers, books, and other maintenance records. From this point on, you can enter the active exchange rates for these currencies and the application automatically converts your international transactions using these rates. You enter these rates through Exchange Rate Entry. You can also temporarily revalue currencies through the Currency Revaluation Process program. Use this program to adjust, or revalue, the exchange rate a specific currency pair has within all your open transactions. All open sales orders, purchase orders, AP invoices, AR invoices, and bank balances that use the selected currency update with the revised exchange rate. Any gains and losses that occur automatically post to the GL accounts assigned to the currency. Tip The rate changes you enter in the Currency Revaluation Process program do not update the active exchange rates defined within Exchange Rate Entry. This program only temporarily changes the exchange rate. If you need, you can also temporarily revalue currencies within general ledger accounts through the GL Currency Revaluation process. This process can be run for each book set up within your company; it updates the Chart of Account values defined for the book. Any accounts which contain actual values are evaluated through this process, and any account which contains amounts in a different currency are selected by this process for revaluation. Override Rates You have control over the exchange rate used on specific records. You can override an exchange rate on an entry record and lock this rate for all other transactions created against this record. The primary financial entry programs, Sales Order Entry , Purchase Order Entry , AR Invoice Entry , and AP Invoice Entry , all contain fields you can use to override the multi-currency amounts calculated automatically by the application. These fields are located on the header sheets found within each entry program. You do this by first selecting the Lock check box on the record header. The Exchange Rate field becomes active, and you can enter the exchange rate value you need for this specific record. The converted amounts are calculated using the conversion rule defined for the currency pair and the updated exchange rate. Now this record is ignored by the multi-currency functionality. As long as the Lock check box is selected, its exchange rate never updates. Its exchange rate is frozen and all transactions created with this record use the locked exchange rate. You can then enter any exchange rate that you need on a specific record and maintain this rate throughout all the transactions calculated against the specific record. Currency Accounts Any amounts generated through currency conversion or revaluation are tracked by the Epicor application. Each reporting currency has its own set of accounts that display these revalued amounts. These accounts are defined as Gain and Loss accounts. The amounts are further divided into Realized and Unrealized categories. 24 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Concepts Usually gains and losses are recognized as Realized when the transaction is either fully or partially complete (in this case, the partial amount is considered settled). In some cases, however, a transaction is only considered Realized when a transaction is fully complete. When gains and losses are considered unrealized, the transaction either is not started or is partially complete (not settled). These transactions typically need to be reversed at some point. When these amounts are reversed, they are changed immediately and both the direct and the reversal revaluation are created at the same time. The appropriate audit records are also created; balances, however, are not affected by the reversed amounts. When the positive amount is booked as debit, a positive revaluation amount is described as gain, while a negative revaluation amount is described as loss (for example, an AR invoice). In the opposite case, when a positive amount is booked as credit, it is described as loss, while a negative revaluation is described as gain (for example, an AP invoice). Gain amounts are always recorded as credits, while loss amounts are always recorded as debits. The accounts defined for each currency are: • Realized Gain • Realized Loss • Unrealized Gain • Unrealized Loss Rounding Each currency can additionally be set up to use a series of rounding rules. A rounding rule is available for a specific value type, like Unit Price, Extended Price, Total, Total Tax, and so on. The rounding rule you define for each value type indicates the value direction in which the amount will be rounded. Available rounding rules: • Round Up • Round Down • Round Nearest • No Round The rounding rule you select for a value type is then used to calculate the final value of a transaction. For example, if you indicate the Unit Price for a currency will be rounded up, a Unit Price value will automatically go to the next highest decimal value. The number of decimals each currency uses is defined on the currency record. If three decimals are defined for the currency, this rounding rule calculates the next highest amount on the third decimal value. You define rounding rules and decimals within Currency Master Maintenance. You enter the decimals allowed for the currency on the Detail sheet, and set up the rounding rules for each value type on the Rounding sheet. Rounding rules are mainly used with sales documents, such as invoices where specific requirements exist for determining how to round values. The multiplier and rules for the rounding total can also be used in AP Invoice Entry. Tip For more information on leveraging multiple currencies, review the Currency Management module documentation. Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 25 Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup This section documents how you configure the multi-company and multi-site functionality to run within the Epicor application. In this environment, the companies or sites reside on the same database, but some topics also deal with the specifics of the Service Bus (multiple database) scenario. You need to follow these steps on each Epicor workstation. Verify Multi-Site Management License Verify you have the Multi-Site Management license module codes for both companies or sites participating in Multi-Company/Multi-Site communication. Verify an External System Record Use the following steps to verify an external system record is available that uses the Direct transfer method. For external systems using Service Bus, see the following topic. 1. Launch External System Maintenance. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance 2. Click the External System... button. The External System Search window appears. 3. Click Search. 4. Scroll through the Search Results grid, select the Multi-Company Direct external system, and click OK. 5. Verify the Transfer Method is DIRECT. This transfer method writes multi-company records directly to the outbound table within the sending company and then this data next updates the inbound table within the receiving company. Important If you discover you do not have an external system record that uses a DIRECT transfer method, create a new external system. Once you have entered an Identifier and a Description for this external system, click the Transfer Method drop-down list and select the DIRECT option. Specify Settings for Service Bus External System If you are using the SERVICEBUS transfer method - for multiple companies on different databases - you will need to enter additional settings for its External System record. 1. Launch External System Maintenance. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance 26 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup 2. Click the External System... button. The External System Search window displays. 3. Click Search. 4. Scroll through the Search Results grid, select the Multi-Company external system, and click OK. 5. Verify the Transfer Method is SERVICEBUS. 6. In the Service Bus Connection pane, fill in the fields according to their description. Field Description Server FQDN Specifies the SQL Azure Server's Fully Qualified Domain Name. Namespace The Service Bus Service Namespace specified for your Windows Azure Server. Secret Issuer Name A secret credential used to authenticate with the Windows Azure Service Bus. Secret Issuer Secret An issuer secret used to authenticate with the Windows Azure Service Bus. Environment ID Specifies the Service Bus environment host name. HTTP Port Specifies the Service Bus HTTP communication port number. TCP Port Specifies the Service Bus TCP communication port number. 7. Click Save. Note For more info on Windows Azure™ Service Bus, review the available Microsoft® documentation found at: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj656647.aspx To learn how to build the compose Service Bus connection strings, review the documentation found at: http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/windowsazure/jj149830.aspx Configure an External Company Record Use the following steps to configure an external company record. 1. Configure an External Company record for each company that will communicate with the current company. Example If you have three companies in your multi-company setup, each company will have two external company records set up. In a two company multi-company setup, each company will have one external company record. 2. Launch External Company Maintenance. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 27 Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 3. In the External System drop-down selection list at the top, select Multi-Company Direct. Note For Service Bus scenarios, use the Multi-Company system instead. 4. Search to see if any multi-company records already exist. 5. If the record does not exist, enter in the external company ID with which you will be exchanging information. This is not the current company you are logged into. (You cannot enter the current company ID as an external company.) 6. If you will use the Multi-Company Dashboard functionality to display data between companies, or if this company exists on a different database, use the Connection pane to define the AppServer information you need to pass data between the external company and the current company. 7. Save the record and exit External Company Maintenance. 8. Launch External Company Configuration. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 9. In the External System drop-down list, select Multi-Company Direct. Note For Service Bus scenarios, use the Multi-Company system instead. 10. Search and select the external company record you opened (or created) above. 11. Enter the applicable information into the external company record. The External Company record will look similar to the following: 28 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup 12. If you will use the Consolidated Purchasing functionality, click on the External Site and External Warehouse sheets to define the site and warehouse involved in the purchasing process. Tip For more information on setting up the information on this sheet, review the Consolidated Purchasing topics. 13. Save the record. Close the External Company Configuration window. 14. Switch companies. To do this on the Main Menu, select Options > Change Companies or expand the company node on the tree view. 15. Select the other company that will be used in this Multi-Company configuration. 16. Launch External Company Maintenance within this company and set up an external company record which points to the original company, then configure the record in External Company Configuration. As a result, each of the two companies in this example have an external company record pointing to each other company in this Multi-Company setup. Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 29 The list may be blank. The screen should look similar to the following if you have an interval schedule already created. To do this. Notice that the Schedule Type is Interval. 2. you need to create one. 4. select New > New Schedule. d. For example. such as the Multi-Company Direct Server process.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Verify an Interval Schedule Use the following step to verify if you have an Interval schedule set up. select System Setup > System Maintenance > System Agent. Menu Path: System Setup > System Maintenance > System Agent Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 30 seconds. e. Enter an interval. From the File menu. Click the Agent ID button. 1. b. You now have an interval schedule to which you can assign tasks. 3. 30 Epicor ERP | 10. To do this: a.0. Enter the Description. If you do not have an interval schedule. Determine if an interval schedule has been created. Select Interval as the Schedule Type.700 . c. Expand the tree on the left until you see a list of schedules. Save the record. 3. Select the Recurring check box. it runs against all the other companies in the database. Select the Verbose logging level for additional logging detail. Click the Submit button in the toolbar. You now have a startup task schedule to which you can assign tasks. Save the record. From the Schedule drop-down list. select the Interval Schedule that already existed. Once this process is running in one company. Clear the Continuous Processing check box. d. Launch Multi-Company Direct Server Process. make the following settings: a. 2.700 31 . This log tracks the progress of the multi-company process. or you created in the previous section. c. You can then open this log in a text editor to review the results. You activate this log by selecting a directory path and a file name for the log. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process The screen may look similar to the following: Tip You should also make this process generate the Multi-Company Log.0. so you can use this log as a troubleshooting tool to find and correct errors. On the Selection tab. b.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup 5. Use the following steps to place the Multi-Company Direct Server process on an Interval schedule: 1. only one process is needed to run at one time. Epicor ERP | 10. Schedule the Multi-Company Direct Server Process The Multi-Company Direct Server process passes data from the outbound table in the sending company to the inbound table in the receiving company. such as the Multi-Company Server process. Because of this feature. or wherever you specified during process scheduling. Enter the name for the log file as well. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process 6.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Now the process is submitted to run. 4. Find and select the directory path where you want to generate this log.700 . Click OK. The Multi-Company Direct Server Process now displays on the Scheduled Tasks tab of the System Monitor. Launch the System Monitor from your Windows menu tray. Then use Windows Explorer™ to navigate to this location. 5. If the Multi-Company Direct Server process is running. 3. ) 10. 2. follow the steps below. To open the System Monitor. Click the Submit ( button to save your changes to the process.0. You can check this in Windows Task Manager. Navigate to this program. Verify the Task Agent Is Running The Multi-Company Direct Server process is attached to an Interval schedule. 2. launch the Multi-Company Direct Server process as described below to see the directory path and file name. The Multi-Company Direct Server Process instance that was scheduled should display in the Active Tasks tab. 4. When you want to see what is being generated in this log. 1. navigate to System Setup > System Maintenance > System Monitor. 32 Epicor ERP | 10. Click on the Active Tasks sheet. 1. 8. Click the Log Filename button. 7. Return to the System Monitor. 9. It will also still be in the Scheduled Tasks tab. open the log file. select the task and click Delete on the Standard toolbar. Launch the Epicor application. Verify that the Epicor ICE Task Agent is running. You activate the log within the Multi-Company Direct Server process. If you just want to find the log . The process generates the log. The file is located by default in the working directory of the database. If you want to change the name of the log file or its directory path location. Review Multi-Company Direct Log File Use these steps to review the informative log file created during processing. 1. If the records are being sent and received. Review the MultiCompanyDirect.700 33 . Test the Communication Use the following steps to test if Multi-Company environment is communicating properly. Review the MultiCompanyDirect. Epicor ERP | 10. 3. the Multi-Company log in Verbose mode will include the message: Processing Inbound Customer (EPIC03). your Multi-Company functionality is configured and running.0. The Multi-Company Process transmits Customer and ShipTo records from that company and sends it to the other companies (for example Epicor USA and Epicor Financials Co. the Multi-Company log in Verbose mode will include the message: Processing Outbound Customer (EPIC02/EPIC03). create a new customer and select the Global checkbox. 1. In one company (for example Epicor Education). Verify that the Task Agent is running. and intervention is needed during the transmission process. The log file could look similar to the following: • If the outbound transmission is working properly.log file to verify that the records were sent. The companies may have different sets of codes. Review Validation Errors Use these steps to review the validation errors. Save the record.).log file for errors. 4. You need to create a Global Customer and verify that the customer is transmitted to the other companies. Careful examination is required when sharing information between two companies.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Review the log to see if the Multi-Company Direct Server process generated any errors. • If the inbound transmission is working properly. 2. 700 . Your data may look similar to the following: 34 Epicor ERP | 10. The translation process compares the code sets of the two companies and synchronizes the data in order to save manual steps. 3. To do this. notice that the Company record. and FOB sent from company EPIC02 were invalid when the company EPIC02 arrived in company EPIC03. navigate to System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance > Translations. the Territory and Tax Region were invalid. Allocation Priority. For example. On the ShipTo record. Quote Markup.0.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 2. and correct the issues. Review Automatic Data Translations Use these steps to review the results of the automatic translation that runs during the inbound portion of the transmission process. Attempt to find out why the records were invalid. Customer Group. Review the translation data. Tax Region. 1. Link Vendor. Incoming Intercompany PO Suggestions. Functions include Link Customer. If company EPIC02 sends Customer records where the Terms Code is blank. A translation should be set up in company EPIC03 on the external company record for EPIC02 with Source Value NET30 and Target Value N30. 2. the inbound customer will fail validation.700 35 . 1.0. Epicor ERP | 10. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > Integrated Table Workbench Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Most of the functions within Multi-Company have a specially designed screen for handling these errors.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup Example If the Terms Code NET30 exists in company EPIC02. Modify the required values. Link Part. Review Integrated Workbench When a Validation Error occurs. but the same code is N30 in company EPIC03. and Add Intercompany Receipt. use the Integrated Table Workbench to access the record. create a record indicating the default value. manual intervention is required. If you are unable to fix a validation error using one of these screens. and your system needs inbound Customer records to have the Terms Code default to N30. your company displays as a separate node on the Main Menu. Before you can pass data between two or more companies. 2. 36 Epicor ERP | 10. 6. You do this within the Epicor Administration Console. From the context menu. Enter the Company ID you will use for your new company. The next time you launch the Epicor application. Expand the primary node for the Epicor database for which you need to add the new company. All of the modules you have licensed with Epicor display below your new company node. For example. click the Start button and navigate to the following location: Start>All Programs>Epicor Tools>Epicor Administration Console Create a Company Value Follow these steps to create a new company value within the database. you must add a company value to the database.700 . these records must also be configured to use multi-company functionality. Right-click on the Companies node. select Add Company. Enter the Name you want to display for the company on the Main Menu within the Epicor application. You use this program to perform a variety of tasks within your Epicor database. Important Be sure you set up a new company in the sequence described in this section. expand the Server Management node. 1. Each record you create is often needed by the following record documented in this sequence.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup This section documents the various maintenance records you need to define in order to create a multi-company environment new company. 5. Company Database Value Before you can create a new company within your Epicor application. Click OK. This program is located on the server you use for the Epicor application.0. 7. Within the Epicor Administration Console tree view. The Add Company window displays. EPIC02. For example: ERP10. you must create various records which support this functionality. In many cases. To launch this program from your server machine. 3. 4. 700 37 . The cost set is then used for the cost method calculations for all the parts manufactured within the sites linked to the cost set. 7. 3. Before you can complete these steps. Site Cost IDs A Site Cost ID is a record you use to reference a cost set. For example. the company displays as a new node on the Main Menu tree view. This makes sure the same cost method is used for all the sites linked to this cost set. Epicor ERP | 10. 2. click Save. To modify the company record and create other multi-company maintenance records. enter the name. 5. A cost set defines how costs are assigned to parts within a specific site or sites. You do this within the Company Configuration program. and other primary information for this company. You create and modify site cost IDs within Site Cost Maintenance. When you finish defining the primary values on a new company. Modify a New Company Record You must enter some primary values for your new company record. When you next launch your Epicor application. 6. Enter other primary values you need for the new company. you just need to enter the base values required to define the new company. 4. Launch Company Maintenance. Select the Tax Information which applies to the new company. You first need to enter the primary values for the new company. Later you will return to Company Configuration to select various items you created in other maintenance programs. phone number. Save your changes and exit Company Configuration. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration 1. The company record is automatically created. Navigate to the Detail sheet. You need to create and define the default site cost ID for the new company. In the Company Info section. This record is then the default for all sites you create within the company. address. use the Emails and Forms sheet to indicate the SMTP Server that will process the new company's email. you must create the new company within the Epicor Administration Console. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. At this point.0. expand this node. you can then setup the company record within the application. A site cost identifier defines a reference to a cost set.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Company Record After you define the company value on the database. 2. Tip If you need to add more sites to the new company. These years cannot. Click Save. review the Site Cost Maintenance topics or the Job Costing Technical Reference Guide. 6. Click on the Site Cost ID button to find and select your new Site Cost ID. launch Site Maintenance and create the site record. Each fiscal year can have as many fiscal periods as you need. you can then select it from the Primary Site drop-down list. For more information on this functionality. You may need to do this when you consolidate books between multiple companies. A Production Calendar defines the day-to-day schedule needed for producing and delivering products through manufacturing centers. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Cost Maintenance 1.700 . click New. 4. You can search for these topics within the application help. Tip Do not confuse fiscal calendars with production calendars. 5. Each fiscal calendar can contain as many years as you need. Fiscal Calendars Fiscal calendars define the years and periods used for financial reporting. 8. 3. Indicate the Primary Site associated with this Site cost ID. however. Enter the Site Cost ID and Description values you need. This program is located within the Financial Management>Multi-Site>Setup folder. 9.0. You assign a default fiscal calendar to a new company. Navigate to the Modules-All Modules-General sheet. overlap -. each new company has one main site. When you finish. On the Standard toolbar. You must create at least one fiscal calendar and then link this calendar to the new company. 7. click Save. A Fiscal Calendar defines the years and fiscal periods required to report on financial activity. By default.nor can there be any gaps between the years. 38 Epicor ERP | 10.If needed. These required values display within various programs and reports. A default Site Cost ID is now defined for your new company. you can also select different fiscal calendars on books you create within this company.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Create a Site Cost ID Follow these steps to create a Site Cost ID. The remaining options define either how the Site Cost ID interacts with the Costing Workbench or costs secondary FIFO layers. Return to Company Configuration. After you save the new site record. The default value is the number of closing periods on the previous fiscal year. the default value is 0. The entries in the Fiscal Calendar ID and Description fields identify the calendar on reports and in other General Ledger maintenance programs. Complete the Fiscal Calendar ID and Description fields to create a new calendar. The Start Date is set to the current date by default. 14. The Year and Start Date fields are filled in from information you entered when you created the fiscal year. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration 13. The default value is the number of periods on the previous fiscal year.0. Subsequent years will increase by one year. but you must choose a number of 1 or greater. On the Detail sheet. The End Date is set equal to the Start Date until at least 1 period is added. 12. Navigate to Company Configuration. the default value is 0. by a quarter). If a previous fiscal year does not exist.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Create a Fiscal Calendar Follow these steps to create a fiscal calendar and then link it to your new company. 5. 10. Complete the Number of Periods field with the number of periods you want to allocate for the fiscal year. Click Save. 4. There is no default value for this field. Click New and select New Fiscal Calendar. If necessary. Complete the Year Suffix field if you would like to add a suffix to differentiate the fiscal year (for example. 9. 2. complete the End Date and Period Duration fields. The current year displays in the Fiscal Year field and the current date displays in the Start Date field for the first fiscal year of a fiscal calendar. 8. 11. Click Save. 3. A default fiscal calendar is defined on your new company. Epicor ERP | 10. If a previous fiscal year does not exist. Complete the Number of Closing Periods field with the number of closing periods you want to assign to the fiscal year. 6. click the Fiscal Calendar button to find and select the fiscal calendar. Click New and select New Fiscal Year. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Fiscal Calendar 1.700 39 . Complete the End Date field with the date you want your fiscal year to end. Click Save. The default value of Period Duration is 1. Click the Action menu and select Generate Periods. 7. Click Save. If you wish. Define by Date is automatically selected and the Earliest Apply Date field activates. If a different date is not defined for a module.0. Find and select the fiscal period that you want. your Epicor application uses the default date defined for the selected fiscal year. 40 Epicor ERP | 10. You must first designate a fiscal calendar from the Company Configuration program before setting up an earliest apply date. 7. The fiscal periods listed are based on your company fiscal calendar. The Earliest Apply Date is now set up for the new company and (optionally) any other specific modules. The Module/Transaction Type and Earliest Apply Date fields activate. click on the Down Arrow next to the New button and New Type. You can now do one of two actions: • Select a date from the calendar in the Earliest Apply Date field. Select a module from the Module/Transaction Type list. 5. • Select the Define by Fiscal Period radio button option. 4. you can select the Define by Fiscal Period radio button option. Define The Earliest Apply Date Use these instructions to define an Earliest Apply Date for the new company. this defines the date value for the entire company. You can also define a date to resume posting transactions on a specific module. The fiscal year and period that match the date you select display in the Fiscal Year/Period fields and the date appears in the Effective Date field. When you define an Earliest Apply Date for a specific module. 2. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > General Operations > Earliest Apply Date 1. all GL transaction types which run within this module use this value to calculate the earliest date available for posting business transactions. Depending on the radio button option you select. Click New. click Save. You define an Earliest Apply Date to prevent transactions from being posted in closed periods. Tip Be sure the Earliest Apply Date value is on a date or period before when you will load financial data into the application. however. You can assign the Earliest Apply Date to a selected fiscal year. Repeat this process to define specific apply dates for other modules. The Define by Date field is automatically selected. When you finish. you do one of the two actions described in step 2. however. 8. The last day of the fiscal period displays in the Earliest Apply Date field. This prevents errors from displaying when you enter or import financial data into your new company. The Fiscal Year/Period field activates. 3.700 .New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Earliest Apply Date The Earliest Apply Date is the first date on which any financial transaction can be applied in a new company. If you wish to define a separate Earliest Apply Date for a specific module. 6. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. 2. You next must create at least one Rate Type. updating the exchange rates as needed.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Multiple Currencies You use the multi-currency functionality to enter and maintain the currencies through which your new company does business. The multi-currency functionality affects transactions throughout the entire application. Because these currency code values are different. You should also consider which currencies will be global currencies shared across multiple companies.700 41 . Enter the Currency Code identifier you want for the currency. ensuring that your monetary amounts on all your transactions are up to date. Each record has both a Currency Code and a Currency ID value. Add a Currency You add a currency to a new company through the following steps. you enter the starting exchange rates you will use in Exchange Rate Maintenance. For example. You then navigate to Company Configuration to define which rate type will be used against which module. this record defines the conversion rules you use against each currency pair. the Epicor application will treat these records as separate currencies. so this record indicates US dollars in the new company. you create a child company which uses US dollars. and you enter a currency code and a currency ID with "USA" values. Tip Be sure to verify the currency codes match on the currency master records used by all companies. active exchange rates. you cannot change this value. You then return to Currency Master Maintenance to activate these currencies and indicate that each currency is global -. and the exchange rate is calculated as a zero value. You can enter an extensive number of transactional currencies. This section of the guide describes how you enter and activate currencies. The Link Global Records section later describes how you share global currencies across companies. You can create as many rate types as you need within Rate Type Maintenance. The first currency you create is by default assigned the "Base" currency code and then you enter a "USA" currency ID. your transactions can be automatically revalued using the current. A typical error can occur when you set up a new child company. Epicor ERP | 10. but you are limited to four reporting currencies (one base currency and three reporting currencies) which you can use to post GL transactions. This value defines the unique internal identifier for the currency. You enter currency records within Currency Master Maintenance. The Currency ID defines how the currency displays on various reports and programs within the company. Each currency is paired with all other currencies you enter for the new company. once you save this record. You can then begin recording transactions in each global currency. you can link them with child companies. As exchange rates between currencies change (as often as daily). Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Currency Master Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. You next need to enter the currencies and conversion rules which will be used by the new company. you first create the currencies required by the new company. You then create a currency record in the parent company to consolidate with this child company.0.used across multiple companies. To complete the multi-currency setup. To begin. the Currency Code defines the entire currency record for uses like consolidation and other system processes. 1. When you complete entering your global currency records. but all display rates are entered by users and shown using this factor value. and other records.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 3. select the Reporting Currency check box. These relationships display in Rate Type Maintenance as undefined. The Number of Decimals area indicates how many decimals this currency can display for unit cost amounts. This currency then becomes available on Currency lists throughout the application. 11. 10. use this program to then define the conversion rule which applies to each currency pair. and other records that use this currency. 4. This extended explanation is printed on quotes. Be sure to enter unique values that help users quickly identify the rate type on various reports and programs. This value appears on reports and programs near the currency amounts. You must select at least one currency as a reporting currency for each company. Before you create a rate type. purchase orders. sales orders. Use the Code and Description fields to define the main values used for this rate type. 5. 12. Some currency symbol examples: • $ • £ • € • ¥ 6. This currency is the default used for all transactions within the company.700 . This check box is selected by default. Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Rate Type 1. general ledger. 7. Continue to add the currencies you need. sales orders. Use the Description field to enter a concise explanation for this currency. Each currency you add through Currency Master Maintenance is automatically paired with another currency. This check box activates the exchange rate fields for this currency within Exchange Rate Entry. Select the Base Currency check box to indicate that this record is the primary currency used by the new company. invoices. If this currency can be used to display amounts on invoices. This value displays on reports and windows which show currency information. You can change this value later on if you need. 9. Click New. 8. and banks. When you finish. 42 Epicor ERP | 10. Select the Maintain Rate check box to indicate that exchange values for this currency can be updated. Enter the Scale Factor you use to modify the actual exchange rate in order to display amounts for this currency in a more understandable format. Define the Currency ID you want for this currency record. you must enter currencies within Currency Master Maintenance. and any amounts posted through inventory. Only one currency can be defined as the Base Currency. Enter the Document Description you need. assets. The Currency Symbol indicates the special character used for this currency. tax amounts. The actual rates within the database are not changed by this value. You can have between 0-5 decimals for Cost and Price amounts and 0-3 decimals for General amounts like extended prices. You can have up to four reporting currencies (including the base currency) in each new company. 2.0. click Save. Create a Rate Type Rate types define the conversion rules applied against all the conversion pairs within your new company. The Alternate Cross-Rate currency defined on the Detail sheet is the alternate Interim currency. Epicor ERP | 10. Be sure to select the Global check box. The Source Currency fields display the original currency for the conversion rule.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount.Divides an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency. The Target Currency fields display the resulting currency for the conversion rule. 13. The Cross-Rate currency defined on the Detail sheet is the Interim currency. • Alternate Cross-Rate -. Use the Decimals field to define how many decimals are calculated and displayed for amounts converted through this rate type.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount. 6. click on the Conversion Rules tab. 4. or Interim. 9. Available conversion rules: • Direct . select the Round check box. 11. 7. 12. • Cross-Rate -.Uses an alternate Interim currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies. • Inverse -. currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies. When you finish defining the primary values for the rate type. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. If you select this check box. use the Code button in the Base Rate Type section to select the rate type you wish to use as a parent record to the current rate type. Use the Conversion Rule drop-down list to define the rule used for the conversion. select the Round check box. any updates made to this rate type are also automatically sent to all companies that use this rate type. The Cross Rate Currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency for the Cross-Rate conversion rule or the primary interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules. 10. If the Global Lock check box is clear. If you can round values calculated for the Alternative Cross Rate Currency. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. Use the Tree View to navigate between the available rules. 15. Optionally. 14. review the Global Rounding section later in this chapter. All of the available currency pairs can be displayed on this sheet. • Double Cross-Rate -. • Reverse Double Cross-Rate -. however. This conversion rule runs the Inverse calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency. 8. If you can round values calculated for the Cross Rate Currency. 5. The conversion rule changes amounts in the Source Currency to the Target Currency.Uses an intermediate.0.For more information on rounding.700 43 . any updates you enter in the new company are not sent to other companies. This conversion rule runs the Direct calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency. The Alternative Cross Rate currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency for the Alternate Cross-Rate conversion rule or the Secondary Interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules. Use this field when you want the current rate type to use conversion rules from another rate type. You can enter between 0-6 decimal places in this field.Multiplies an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 3. This value indicates that this rate type can be used by multiple companies within your database. If the check box is clear. Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > General Operations > Exchange Rate Entry 1. you can also use the Exchange Rates Import program to import rates from an outside file generated by Epicor Service Connect. If this check box is selected. click on the Actions menu and select Import. however. The conversion rules defined for each currency pair update amounts using the exchange rate you enter in this program. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. the application considers that the conversion rule uses a variable.0. 3. You can also import the exchange rates you wish to use. You can also click the Effective Date button to find and select an existing exchange rate record. you must create a rate type within Rate Type Maintenance and you must enter currencies within Currency Master Maintenance. exchange rate and it can be updated daily. To do this. all other fields on this sheet become unavailable. Before you can enter exchange rates. Click the Rate Type button to find and select the rate type you want. Enter Exchange Rates Use Exchange Rate Maintenance to enter exchange rates for currency pairs and an effective date for the rate type to which each currency pair belongs. Tip Although you can enter these rates manually. 5. enter text within the Reference field. The currency pair displays along with an arrow indicating the direction of the conversion and the exchange rate below it. 10. 20. 17. The grid on this sheet displays all the currency pairs and contains a drop-down list where you select the conversion rule you need. If you select this check box. To define all the conversion rules for this rate type at the same time.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 16. the rate is locked. and Conversion Rule fields all display values defined within the rate type. When you finish. The Source Currency. Enter the Rate Value you need for the currency pair. 2. or float. 19. 18. 4. If you need to record additional information. Click on the Matrix sheet to update all of the exchange rates for the currency pairs at the same time. 9. Use the Fixed Rate to indicate whether the rate defined for this currency pair can update the Effective Rate value. or fixed. Click on the List sheet to select another currency pair to update. 6. 44 Epicor ERP | 10. and the Effective Rate cannot be updated by this conversion rules. 7. The Exchange Rates Import window displays. Target Currency. Your Epicor application uses the conversion rule defined on the rate type to calculated the values of converted amounts. Select the Use Base Rate check box if the conversion rules from the parent rate type (if one is selected) should be used for the currency pair. 8. click on the Matrix sheet.700 . The Display Mode indicates how the conversion rules displays within programs that display source and target currency amounts. Enter the Effective Date on which the exchange rates begin. click Save. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 11. 3.Defines the rate type used for all sales orders and AR invoices. The Date Order field defines the sequence through which dates appear when the file is imported into the application. the default value is the comma ( . 12. • Inventory and Production . • Cash Management . use the drop-down lists to indicate which rate type will be used for a specific financial area within the new company. Before you complete these steps. Navigate to the Modules>All Modules>Currency sheet. purchasing.Defines the rate type used for all purchase orders and AP invoices. 15. Available financial areas: • Company General . Available formats are m/d/y and d/m/y. • Payroll . or other financial areas. 13. ). This option is the default value. The options are: • Force 1:1 rate for the same currencies . • Always use locked rate conversion through base . exchange rates when the target currency is the same as source currency and the Lock check box is selected on a specific record (sales order. Click on the Filename button to find and select the imported file. • Purchase and Expenditure .700 45 . This selection indicates how the company freezes. Enter the value you need. • Sales and Invoicing . 14. production equipment. Epicor ERP | 10. Click OK. The List Delimiter field indicates the character used to divide and organize the date within the imported file. Define what Rate Locking Option will be used with your new company. Define Company Rate Types You use the Currency Rates sheet within Company Configuration to define the rate types used by various financial areas. The converted amount is then converted again using the exchange rate for the target currency. and current exchange rates your new company will use. The Number Format defines how number values are imported from the Service Connect file.Causes the amount used on the source transaction to be converted using the exchange rate defined on the base currency. or locks. production. • Fixed Assets .0. Select the format you need from the drop-down list.Indicates the rate type used for all stock quantities and production expenses that occur between sites located in different countries.Causes the amount used on the source transaction to also be used on the target transaction.Defines the rate type used for multiple currency transactions that involve cash amounts. 2.Indicates the rate type used as the default for all transactions that do not fall in the sales.items such as facilities. purchase order). you must enter the currencies. AR invoice.Defines the rate type used for all financial transactions that involve the assets of the current company . In the Default Rate Types section. All international transactions that occur within this financial area use the conversion rules defined within the selected rate type. rate types. regardless whether the exchange rate is or is not locked. This option calculates changes made to the exchange rates with the base currency defined for this company. and computers.Defines the rate type used for employee expenses that require international transactions. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration 1. 2. 4. while you need another COA in order to consolidate transactions with a parent company. you must define the currencies. When you finish. and you can define a number of values -. Before you can complete this task. 6. 3. The multiple currencies are now active within your new company. rate types. If you clear (not select) this check box.700 . Each currency is now available for transactions within the new company.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 4. Optionally. Activate Currencies To complete multi-currency setup for your new company. dynamic 46 Epicor ERP | 10. you must first activate the currencies and indicate they are globally shared between multiple companies.0.for each segment. You must also define the rate types used by each financial area within the new company. click Save on the Standard toolbar. They can also be used to consolidate books between multiple companies as well. When you finish. click Save. If you select this check box. Select the Global Currency check box to indicate all the companies within your database can now use this currency for their transactions as well. 5. As you create multiple COAs. updates made to this global currency record automatically update the currency record in all companies which use it. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Currency Master Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Each account can have up to 20 definable account segments. Chart of Accounts You now must set up the chart of accounts you will use for the new company. They can also be used to calculate amounts in transactions for other companies. You can create multiple charts of accounts if you require. All the currency records load within Currency Master Maintenance. and exchange rates used by the new company.like Effective Date and Normal Balance -. You can create as complex of an account structure as you need. Select the Global Lock check box. consider the reporting requirements you need to satisfy with each COA. Repeat these steps on all currencies you have entered for the new company. For example. 1. Each segment itself can be up to 50 characters in length. You can also click the List sheet and modify the currency records within the grid. You can display each currency record on the Detail sheet by selecting it on the tree view. Click the Currency Code button to find and select all of the currencies you have entered for the new company. Activate a currency by clearing its Inactive check box. other company versions of this currency record do not update when changes are made to the global currency record. you may need one COA for general account entry inside your new company. These segments can be controlled. The charts of accounts (COAs) you design create different views of the financial transaction data. These values display on various programs and reports. In the above example. including delimiters.Each company can have multiple books. The maximum length of each account is 200 characters. This segment represents your Natural account. To do this. You can create as many as 20 segments. Typically Segment 1 is often named Natural. To complete the COA setup. Tip The first segment you will define is your chart segment. and within each book you define the currency.700 47 . You begin by launching Chart of Accounts Maintenance. Enter the Chart of Account identifier and concise Description. Create a COA You first must define the structure of a new COA. and fiscal calendar the book will use to post its business transactions. You are now ready to define the segment values used with this COA. Select New COA Segment. and so on. you then use General Ledger Account Maintenance to generate the accounts. 4. you would create one main book for the new company and a consolidation book for reporting to the parent company. The Segment Number identifies the segment in relation to the other segments on the chart. and which need to be dynamic? • Which segments need to be self-balancing? • Should an account be used across companies? You link a specific chart of accounts to a book.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup and optional for data entry.Some examples of other names: Department. 3. 2. The segments can also be displayed in any order. 9. 8. this check box is selected. Epicor ERP | 10. consider these questions: • Do you need multiple COA's for each company? • What does your entire GL account structure need to include? • What types of account segments do you need to define this overall account structure? • Which segments need to be controlled. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. click the Down Arrow next the New button.0. As you begin creating a new COA. 6. The Chart Length field indicates the length of the chart. Product. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Chart of Accounts 1. Create the new COA records you need and then define the structure and characteristics of its account segments. Enter the Name of the segment. Customer. 5. If this COA is the Master for the current company. chart of accounts. 7. Use the Separator Character field to indicate the character used to separate the various segments within the chart. You then use Account Segment Values Maintenance to define values for the dynamic and controlled segments used within your COAs. You can change the order in which Controlled Segments and Dynamic Segments display. If you select this option.The segment must be included in general ledger accounts. you can select the Use Business Entity check box. 12. This check box indicates this segment uses a business entity to define the segment value. Select the Balance Options you want for this account segment. If this check box is clear.The segment can be either optional or mandatory. 17. Typically you use this option for project accounting where a current balance is kept independently from the fiscal year. depending on the account mask defined in GL COA Reference Type Maintenance. Use the Entry Control drop-down list to indicate whether the segment must appear in general ledger account codes.700 . • Include in Summary Balance -. 19. you can maintain an income statement independent of the fiscal year.Indicates that the application maintains segment balances for display on reports and trackers. If this check box is clear. the Business Entity drop-down list becomes available. Each segment can contain as many as 50 characters and must have a minimum of 1 character. To change the order. This program is described later in this chapter.Indicates that the application summarizes segment balances for display on reports and trackers. 13. • Optional -. 48 Epicor ERP | 10. 20. Define the Maximum Length and Minimum Length for the account segment. you manually update business entity values. 15. This causes segment values to be added when a system entity record is created. you cannot define a segment shorter than that allowed for the entity. By default. highlight the segment. Select the Alphanumeric check box to indicate that the account segment can include both letters and numbers. • Natural Account -. 16. To modify the order in which the segments display. 18. it indicates that the application uses booking rules and lookup tables to define the segment value. In this case. You use these accounts segments for trail balances.General ledger accounts can be posted without this segment. it indicates that this segment is controlled and cannot be changed by the application. Available options: • Include in Detail Balance -. Each account can have as many as 200 characters. 14. click the Display Order tab.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 10. Available options: • Mandatory -.The segment can be either optional or mandatory for each natural account value.0. You define this option within Account Segment Values Maintenance. If this check box is clear. Use this drop-down list to select the business entity that generates the dynamic values. 11. The Epicor application then defines the value of the dynamic segment based on entity references and booking rules.Indicates that the application maintains year-end segment balances for expense and revenue accounts. the application zeros balances in temporary accounts at year end.This program is explored later in this chapter. Select the Dynamic check box to indicate that this is a dynamic segment. • Reference Account Mask -. Tip The application sets a default minimum length when a dynamic segment uses a business entity. If this segment is dynamic. If you select the Use Business Entity check box. • Opening Balance on P/L -. Select the Create Segment Values check box to indicate that dynamic segment values are created automatically. Next. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 5. Use the Reference Type drop-down list to indicate the reference type used to group values for the segment. Define Accounts Segment Values Each controlled and dynamic segment must now be assigned the values you need for the area of financial activity it records. 3. Continue to add the segments you need. Use the Description field to provide more information about the segment. 3. Click Save on the Standard toolbar.700 49 . right-click to display the context menu. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. 2. The COA structure is generated. You can specify a reference type for segments associated with the GLCOARefType business entity within Epicor ERP | 10. 23. launch Chart of Account Maintenance from within both companies. and select Paste Insert. Right-click the grid to display the context menu and select Copy All. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Segment Values 1. Select the COA you want to copy and display its List sheet. Click on the Up or Down arrows to change the sequence order. The account structure is copied directly into the new COA. Enter the Name you want for the segment value. You must create at least one COA in Chart of Accounts Maintenance before you can complete this task. Enter the Segment Value that identifies this record. 22. Navigate to the Modules>All Modules>General sheet.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 21. Navigate to its List sheet.0. Use this functionality to define options for natural account values and indicate the effective dates for these segment values. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. To save time and ensure accuracy. 1. You must create at least one COA in Chart of Accounts Maintenance before you can complete this step. click the Actions menu and select Rebuild Display GL Account. navigate to Chart of Accounts Maintenance in the other company and create the COA record. This value displays on reports and other programs. Select the default chart of accounts for the company from the COA MasterCOA drop-down list. 4. Select the COA Master You now return to the Company Configuration program to define the master COA you will use for your new company. 2. Define account segment values for all the segments in the new company's COAs. When you are ready to create the chart of accounts. Tip You will probably use the same COA structure between multiple companies. This text can display on custom reports and trackers. 6. and select Paste Insert. Before you can use a COA. Tip You more than likely will use the same account segment values between multiple companies. this value includes the name of the natural account and the abbreviated descriptions of the other segments. By default. 7. The Effective From Date and the To Date fields define the time period during which this account segment values can be used for posting. Enter the text you need. To save time and insure accuracy. this segment value can be used for posting indefinitely (or end when the Active check box is clear). Navigate to its List sheet.700 . Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account 1. navigate to Account Segment Values Maintenance in the other company. Continue to add the account segment values you need. 50 Epicor ERP | 10. The accountsegment values are copied directly to the new company. click Save on the Standard toolbar. launch Account Segment Values Maintenance from within both companies. Click on the Normal Balance drop-down list and indicate whether this account segment values carries debit or credit values. 3. This list is only available for natural accounts. right-click to display the context menu. General ledger accounts contain the natural account segment and other controlled segments. you must set up at least one COA and define the account segment values you want for it. 8. The value within the Description field identifies the account on reports and programs. When you finish. You can then save multi-currency conversion values used in reporting.0. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. Select the Multi-Company check box to indicate this account is used for inter-company processing. Right-click the grid to display the context menu and select Copy All. Generate GL Accounts Use General Ledger Account Maintenance to define valid general ledger accounts for a selected COA. 9.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Chart of Accounts Maintenance. 6. 4. 5. 10. Select the Preserve Description check box to indicate that the Description text cannot be deleted during automatic account updates. 2. Before you can complete this task. If the To Date field is blank. During multi-company processing. Select the Chart of Accounts inside which you want to create this general ledger account. Select the segment values you want to copy and display the List sheet. Use the Category drop-down list to select the COA category you want to link to this account segment value. Next. The GL Account field defines a general ledger account which matches the selected COA. Segments values are applied to the reference type linked with the segment within GL COA Reference Type Maintenance. it must contain all of the valid combinations of required segment values. These updates occur while accounts are generated within Chart of Accounts Maintenance. all multi-company accounts update their data within the COAs of a parent company and its child companies. This value determines how the application maintains both account balances and the accounts that provide financial statement values. Use the Natural Account Options sheets to link COA categories with natural accounts and designate a natural account as a currency account. Consolidation books regulate the transfer of consolidation journals between two standard books in a multi-company environment. to meet requirements to accurately report financial activity. The posting process can be modified for each book to generate the correct financial results. The accounts generate. • What business entities unique to your company need to be linked and represented within the posted GL transactions? Business entities are high level master records items . When you finish. Use this program to indicate the COA.like customers. 9. These updates occur while accounts are generated within Chart of Accounts Maintenance. Books can record financial transactions or consolidate other books. A company uses multiple books to display the same financial information in multiple contexts. and parts . The Effective From Date and the To Date fields define the time period during which this general ledger account can be used for posting. Repeat these steps to create all of the general ledger accounts you need.0. If the To Date field is blank.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 7. When you finish creating the book. you need at least one main book and one consolidation book. You create book records within Book Maintenance. A standard book records financial activity of the company. You can review the new accounts on the List sheet. what changes are required? • Can the posting requirements be changed through COA mapping or through posting rule revisions? Note that COA mappings are easier to create and implement. 11. click Save on the Standard toolbar. • What transactional and reporting currencies are required between companies? • Do the posting processes between books need to be different? If so. Some planning items to consider: • Are multiple books needed within your new company? • If you need to consolidate financial transactions between multiple companies.700 51 . You now have created the account structure you need to conduct business transactions within the new company. fiscal calendar. you modify the posting process for each book through either chart of account (COA) maps or posting rules. this account can be used for posting indefinitely (or end when the Active check box is clear). Create the books you need to correctly display financial results across your multi-company environment. click the Actions menu and select Generate. you then launch GL Transaction Type Maintenance to import the GL transaction types you will use for the new company. You can link business entities to dynamic account segments and then reference an updated posting rule. 10. You can now generate the gl accounts. and default currency you need for the new book. Books Each company can contain multiple books. To do this. Select the Preserve Activation check box to prevent the account from being deactivated during automatic account updates. Use multiple books to value items differently in financial and statutory reports. 8. while posting rules can create more precise posting changes.which are represented in the database as separate tables/fields. Epicor ERP | 10. Each GL transaction type contains the posting rules required to post business transactions to your general ledger. suppliers. 12. you must set up the chart of accounts. 9. 52 Epicor ERP | 10.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Create a Book Create the books you need for the new company. available dynamic segments. This value displays within various reports and programs. Use the Type field to determine the primary function of the book. and currency the book will use. fiscal calendar. • Consolidation books merge balances from several books to create consolidated reports for the company's subsidiaries. Users can no longer enter journal records against this book. Because you are in a multi-company environment. If you no longer wish to use the book. Select the Main Book check box to indicate that the current book is the default. These calendars define the fiscal periods used by the application to record transactions. Click on the Retained Earnings sheet to define the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. You can divide the reported retained earnings balance by substituting a segment in the retained earnings account for a corresponding segment in the in the income statement. You next must import the GL transaction types you will use with this book. You create fiscal calendars within Fiscal Period Maintenance. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Books can also store journals using transaction currencies and post in up to three reporting currencies as needed for multi-currency reporting. an error will display. Click on the Validations sheet to define how errors are handled when journals are posted to the book. 7. select the Inactive check box. For more information. This book automatically displays on all reports and trackers for the current company.0. Each book can have a different COA or several books can share the same COA. 3. 6. review the Chart of Account section later in this chapter. Tip You must select a Retained Earnings account. All journal amounts post in the base currency selected on the book. 10. 4. Use the Book Currency drop-down list to define the currency of the book. Before you create a new book. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. Enter the concise Description for the book. 11.700 . Enter the Book identifier you want. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Book 1. The COA defines valid general ledger accounts. Use the Chart of Account drop-down list to define the Chart of Account (COA) you wish to use with the book. If you do not and you save the book. The book currency can be used on financial reportsand in consolidations. you typically have one book for general ledger entry and another book for consolidation. This value displays on various drop-down lists throughout the application. Select the fiscal Calendar you wish to use with this book. 2. When you finish. 5. 8. and balance maintenance for segments other than the natural account. You can usethe books to either record financial transactions or consolidate other books: • A standard book records financial activity of the companyand has no relationship to other books. Select the Change All Revision Statuses to Active check box. so you have a flexible framework to begin reflecting the specific posting needs of your organization.700 53 .> node on the Table of Content's tab with the application help. you should import the Standard package of transaction types. The Import from XML program opens. Click the Input File Name button and use the Import File program to select the file you want to import. review the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide. GL Journal Codes Journal codes group journals associated with posting different types of GL transactions. Because you are in a multi-company environment.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Import and Activate GL Transaction Types You need to import the GL transaction types the new company will use. For information on how to do this.. Select the Import All check box to indicate you want all of the GL transaction types pulled into your new company. This indicates the current revisions for each GL transaction type will automatically ready for use within the new company. If this is a first time installation. As part of this process.. Tip You can modify the posting rules for each transaction type to reflect the specific posting needs of your company and overall organization. you will also activate the transaction types. This set contains a more open series of rules which do not contain department and division hierarchies. Tip If your Epicor application is an upgrade from the previous Vantage application.03. 5. 4. This package handles the division-chart-department structured used in Vantage 8. 3. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Transaction Type Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 2. The location and name of the file appear in the Input File Name field. Create Multi-Company Journal Codes Enter the journal codes you will use formulti-company transactions within the new company.0. You also need to create a Consolidation Journal which records transactions involved in the consolidation process between books. Click OK to import the GL transaction types. you need to create an Inter-Company Journal for transactions which record across companies. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Journal Code Epicor ERP | 10. select Import ACT Type. 1. import the Extended package of transaction types. From the Actions menu. The posting process will use the posting rules for these revisions to generate GL transactions. this guide is located within the General Ledger>Working With. however. You modify these rules within GL Transaction Type Maintenance as well. 3. In the Description field. GL Controls GL controls define account strings and journal codes used during the posting process to record a specific transaction. enter Multi-Company. 5. Each GL control contains the accounts and journal codes available to a specific record. enter a value to identify the code to internal processes. you need to create a GL control which links to the AR Intercompany. and GL Intercompany account contexts. in turn. This defines the journal contexts and account contexts you will use formulti-company transactions. For example. enter IC for the inter-company journal code and CJ for the consolidation journal. As part of the setup for a new company in a multi-company environment. This type is a default record installed with your Epicor application. 3. You attach the GL control to a specific record. Modify the External Company GL Control Type You need to indicate that the Inter-Company (IC) journal is a journal context for the External Company GL Control Type. From the Journal drop-down list. 4. The Journal Context sheet displays. Click the Type button to find and select the External Company GL control type. A business entry is a static table that contains the table/fields which hold the data involved in the posting process. This default GL control type displays within this maintenance program. 54 Epicor ERP | 10. You then create or modify the child GL control. indicating the specific accounts and journals it contains. 2. A GL control type. Before you do the following steps. these accounts generate as needed based on the business transaction which occurred. and the general ledger accounts and journals defined on the control post business transactions made against this customer record. As part of the posting process. AP Intercompany. you need to create the Inter-Company journal code within Journal Code Maintenance. enter a description displayed in fields used to select the code. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Type 1.0. a new row appears on the the grid on this sheet. 2. and you create and modify GL controls within GL Control Maintenance. is linked to a business entity. In the Context field.700 . Click the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New Journal. You also need to indicate that the GL control uses the Inter-Company journal code you created in Journal Code Maintenance. 4. In the Journal Code field. Each GL control is a child record of a GL control type. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. select the Inter-Company Journal you previously created.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 1. The parent GL control type defines the account and journal contexts for the GL controls it contains. Click New in the Standard toolbar. such as a customer record. You can now use these journal codes on GL controls. You create and modify the GL control types within GL Control Type Maintenance. a default site record is automatically created. You need to verify that the site information is correct and that a site cost ID is defined for the company. Enter the Name and Description you need for the GL Control. you need to launch Site Configuration Control.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 6. 3. These values display within various programs. you set up the transfer order parameters this site follows when fulfilling internal sales orders. Click on the Account sheet. 2. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Code 1. Select the Inter-Company Journal for this journal context. You can then define the module parameters you need for each site record.0. Tip In order to set up how eachthe site interacts with other modules. Epicor ERP | 10. Rough Cut Horizon. To complete the site setup for a new company. click Save on the Standard toolbar. 5. which determines the costing method used for the parts manufactured at this site. review the Site Configuration Control topics. Use this system level program to first pull in the site records you create within Site Maintenance. 4. you must define the Inter-Company Journal on the External Company GL control type. Create a Multi-Company GL Control You now create a multi-company GL control which indicates the specific accounts and journals that record the multi-company transactions. Lastly. you must select a site cost ID on the company record. Before you follow these steps. For more information. You can also define the cost set.700 55 . 6. Each company can have one or more sites in a multi-company environment. Use this sheet to designate the accounts used by a posting process that references the multi-company control. use them to identify the specific GL control.Items you define include planning parameters like Production Preparation Time. When you finish. Click on the Type drop-down list and select the External Company GL control Type. Site Configuration When you create a new company. You enter the primary information for each site within Site Maintenance. Use the Journal Detail sheet to specify the journal codes available to a posting process that references the multi-company GL control. and the Production Calendar. Click on the Account button to find and select the account segments you need. 7. The account contexts from the External Company GL control display on this sheet. however. You can now create a new GL control which uses these account and journal contexts. You can now select this multi-company GL control on all the records you need to track within your multi-company environment. Click New on the Standard toolbar. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 700 . you can create multiple sites within a company. MRP processing uses this value to calculate the End Date for any material in the assembly of the parent site. Because you have a Multi-Site license. you create a part-site detail record for Site Beta. however. The Kit Time field determines how many days are required to assemble a part within the current site. • You then create another part-site detail record for Site Alpha. You then enter a Minimum On-Hand Quantity value of 100. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Site Maintenance 1. you indicate that this is a Transfer part.it can be sold as an individual item to a customer. 3. 2. When the On-Hand Quantity at site Alpha becomes 99 or less. You manufacture Part 567-89K internally within Site Beta. CTP calculations are based on the sales order release site. Use the Calendar ID field to define the production calendar used to manufacture parts within this site. Jobs are then created for the demand calculated through this functionality .0. Tip If you want to create a new Site. the MRP engine will generate both a transfer order suggestion and an unfirm job for Part 567-89K. You then indicate that Site Beta will be the source for Part 567-89K. This value is used during MRP processing to add an additional amount of preparation time to the Planned Action Date on job suggestions and unfirm jobs. Note Refer to Capable to Promise topic in the Primary Calculations and Values section in the Scheduling Technical Reference Guide for more details on Capable to Promise functionality in the Epicor application. 4. Within the Transfer Lead Time field. 56 Epicor ERP | 10.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide CTP in a Multi-Site Environment The Capable to Promise (CTP) calculation determines the date by which a sales order quantity can be delivered (promised) to the customer. For example: Site Alpha needs to stock Part 567-89K . Note: in a multi-company environment. In the Type field.and these jobs can then be incorporated into the schedule. By default. Use the Intrastat Region field to define the region this site uses for Intrastat reporting. Verify Default Site Information Launch Site Maintenance to verify that the default (main) Site is configured to accurately reflect your actual site. Click the Site button to find and select the default Site. • In the Part > Site > Detail sheet in Part Maintenance. the production calendar selected on the company record is used. and can also be used as material for another part it manufactures. you also define that it usually takes 3 days to receive part quantities from Site Beta. 5. you just need one site per company. These dates are calculated for a current order selected within Sales Order Entry. this can be the current site to which the user is logged into when creating a sales order line. entering the MRP details you need for this part. Intrastat logic is used to facilitate business transactions that take place in Europe or other locations which require Intrastat reporting. The Production Prep Time field defines how many days are required in this site to prepare and engineer a job before it can be released for manufacturing. but you can select a different production calendar here if you need. click the New button on the Standard toolbar and enter the Site and Name information. You then use both Site Maintenance and the Site Configuration Control program to indicate how these sites interact with each other. Use the GL Controls sheets to define the default accounts and journal codes. and Shipping/Receiving use the Site Configuration Control program. To further refine how the main site and additional sites interact with various functions like Inventory Management. Be sure to select the External Company GL control type. Tip A shared warehouse is one that belongs to a specific site. This site cost identifier is a reference to a cost set – which defines the costing method (Standard. and the new multi-company GL control. Click the Site button to find and select the site you wish to update. Optionally if you have a multi-site environment. including the multi-company accounts and journals. Any jobs with Start Date values within this date range are scheduled finitely – which means load is not placed against a resource when it does not have the capacity to handle it. When you finish. The Finite Horizon indicates how many dates are added to the Scheduled Start Date during MRP processing. 16. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 15. 9. select a Site Cost ID to indicate the default costing identifier for the site. You can then directly issues parts from or receive parts into this shared warehouse using either linked site. Navigate to the Modules>Inventory Management>General>Detail sheet to select the warehouses which will hold stock quantities for the current site. You next launch Company Configuration to select the Site Cost ID you created previously. Production Management.0. To define these warehouses. 10. 13. you then select the specific GL control you need. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Last.700 57 . You can indicate which warehouses will be the Receiving. Epicor ERP | 10. 7. Shipping. 14. but you can link it through another site configuration control record. You do this by first selecting a GL Control Type which defines the contexts and entities required for a child GL control set. When you finish setting up the site record. Average. 12. 11.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 6. and General warehouses. you can share warehouses between sites. available during the posting process for this site. FIFO) used to calculate costs for all the parts manufactured within sites that share the same cost set. DMR Processing. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click on the Address sheet to enter the mailing location for the site. If you have multiple sites and you want one site to use a different costing method from the company record. click the Shared Warehouses sheet. 8. Use the options within the Transfer Requirement Planning section to define how this site handles transfer orders which come from other areas within your new company. Costs are then accumulated under this default site cost ID. Enter the UOM identifier you need for this code. anda third UOM for purchasing from suppliers. Navigate to the Modules > All Modules > General sheet. it can use one UOM within inventory. If this check box is clear. You can define different unit of measure codes for the same part. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > UOM 1. you must select the site cost ID you previously created. These values measure both manufactured and purchased parts. Units of Measure Use the Unit of Measure (UOM) functionality to define the units of measure values your new company will use. 5. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. 1. but you enter Sq Mtrs in this field. If the Allow Decimal check box is selected. Be sure this value uniquely defines the code. Select the Allow Decimals check box to indicate that users can enter fractional quantities for parts which use this UOM code. You then gather related units of measure together under a unit of measure class. The Symbol field indicates how the UOM code prints on reports and documents throughout the Epicor application.In this example. 2. Enter the Description that accurately explains the code. the Decimals field activates. another UOM for selling to customers. you must create at least one site cost ID within Site Cost Maintenance. You first create the units of measure you need within the company within Unit of Measure Maintenance.700 . Use this field to define the maximum number of decimals which can be entered for quantities in this unit of measure. 2. 3. For example. users can only enter whole quantities for parts that use this code. 3. you enter Box.0. Before you can complete these instructions. the UOM code for square meters is SQM. Create a Unit of Measure Follow these steps to create a new unit of measure for your company.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Select a Site Cost ID Now on the company record. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. you create these classes within Unit of Measure Class Maintenance. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click the Site Cost ID button to find and select the site cost ID you need. The Sq Mtrs value is printed on reports and documents. 4. 6. 58 Epicor ERP | 10. Repeat these steps to create all the unit of measure values required for your new company. When the Active check box is selected. minutes. and grams. and square yards.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 7. 3.Calculates volumes like square feet. All the UOM codes you created through UOM Maintenance appear on this list. box. Enter the Class identifier you want for the UOM class. Use the UOM Code drop-down list to select the code you want added to the class. You are now ready to add the UOM codes to the class. If this check box is clear.Calculates lengths like feet.Calculates weight like pounds. When you finish. Box. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > UOM Class 1. Create a Unit of Measure Class Use UOM Class Maintenance to create class codes you later assign to parts in Part Maintenance. this UOM is no longer available for use. cubic centimeters. 7. it indicates that this UOM code can be used to measure part quantities. Select New UOM Conversion. 6. the Class ID must be identical to the value. Use the Description field to enter a concise explanation for the UOM Class. In most cases. You next need to group these UOM values under a unit of measure class. • Other -. and Pallet. click Save on the Standard toolbar. One UOM code must be selected as the Base UOM. • Weight -. 9. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. which then convert to a single base unit of measure. 8. like Bag. This indicates that users can select this UOM class within Part Maintenance. 9. • Area -. and square yards. the Active check box is selected. click the Down Arrow next to the New button. Before you can create UOM class codes. 5.Calculates counts like each. Select the Class Type you need from the drop-down list. and hours.Calculate times like seconds. These system assigned values define the type of UOM codes which make up the class. 8.0. Continue to create more UOM codes as you need. A UOM Class code contains a bundled set of UOM codes.700 59 . and carton. and yards. To do this. all the other UOM codes then convert to this base value. Select the System Default check box to indicate this UOM class is the default value that displays within Part Maintenance. Available options: • Length -.A UOM class that you use to create a user-defined UOM class. • Count -. cubic centimeters. • Time -.Calculates areas like square feet. 2. you must enter unit of measure values within Unit of Measure Maintenance. By default. Epicor ERP | 10. Click on the Description sheet to enter a longer explanation for the unit of measure code. 4. • Volume -. centimeters. Case. tons. click Save on the Standard toolbar. the Active check box is selected. This record defines how each existing company will interact with your new company. Continue to add the UOM codes you need to the UOM class. EPIC03.700 . 14. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration 60 Epicor ERP | 10. Enter the External Company ID and Description you need.0. 15. Select the Default UOM check box if you want the current UOM code to be the default Inventory UOM code for parts that use this class. Use this functionality to indicate which records are passed between the external company and the new company. the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (or Multi-Company Server Process. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 1. When both external company records exist. then configure them in External Company Configuration. you create an external company for EPIC01 within the EPIC03 company. If this is the primary unit of measure you want for this UOM class select the Base UOM check box. You also define the general ledger information which will pass between the two companies. select the Part Specific check box to create a UOM class that does not use conversion factors. 2. Use the Conversion Factor field to indicate the value required to convert between the current unit of measure code and the Base UOM. If Other was selected for the Class Type on the Detail sheet. 11.10 Each units equal one Case unit. Each company that you want to pass data between must have an external company record in both communicating companies. if the base UOM is Each and ten units are packed into a Case. using Windows Azure™ Service Bus) can send data back and forth between the companies. 4. When you finish. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. You need this new company to communicate with an existing company EPIC01. 3. For example. select Multi-Company Direct.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 10. Launch External Company Configuration. All the other UOM codes within this class must convert to this primary UOM. you must create an external company record. By default. 13. 12. 5. You then navigate to EPIC01 and create an external company record for EPIC03. External Companies In order for the new company to share data between other companies. From the External System drop-down list. You create external companies within External Company Maintenance. which indicates that this UOM code can be used on part records. enter 10 as the conversion factor . Click Save and exit External Company Maintenance. Example You are creating a new company. To do this. Now the multi-company process can pass data between both companies. Create an External Company Create an external company record for each company for which you want the new company to share data. This indicates that packing slip information will be sent to the external company. From the External System drop-down list. Click External Company ID button.0. Select the Send Pack check box. 22. Select the Receive AP Invoices check box. 21. 8. you select AP allocations on specific AP invoice lines. 14. 20. Enter the Transfer Days to External Company value. 9. 10. This prefix is automatically placed on any journal groups that process intercompany transactions. This indicates that inter-company purchase order suggestions will be sent to the external company.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 16. Select the Send GL Accounts check box. Enter the Journal Group Prefix you want for this external company. This indicates the number of days required to transfer an order from one company to the partner supplier or partner customer company. 7. This indicates that customer information will be sent to the external company. 17. You then enter the Partner Customer ID as it appears in the external company. The value is subtracted from the PO Need By Date to calculate the Need By Date on a transfer sales order. To activate inter-company trading. You now must define how the external company handles financial information it sends and receives from your new company. 15. 13. search for and select the external company ID you created. 12. select Multi-Company Direct. The fields in the Inter-Company Trading section activate. You then enter the Partner Supplier ID as it appears in the external company. 19. 11.700 61 . Enter the Supplier ID for the company who is supplying product through inter-company trading. This indicates this external company can receive Accounts Payable allocations from your new company. Select the Allow GJ Allocations to check box. 23. This indicates that part information will be sent to the external company. Epicor ERP | 10. This indicates that AR invoices will be sent to the external company. This indicates that your new company will receive AP invoices from the external company. 6. Select the Send AR Invoices check box. this indicates that this external company can transfer general ledger account information to your new company. Navigate to the Multi-Company sheet. Enter the Customer ID for the company who is purchasing product through inter-company trading. Select the Send Part check box. This indicates that this external company can receive General Ledger allocations from your new company. Select the Send Customer check box. 18. You use allocations to automatically distribute expense amounts across several accounts. Select the Send Supplier check box. select the Enable check box. Select the Send PO Suggestions check box. Select the Allow AP Allocations to check box. This indicates that supplier information will be sent to the external company. 5. Your new company is now linked to these tables and fields within the external company. The tree view populates with the multi-company tables for each company.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 24. From the Company drop-down list. click Save on the Standard toolbar. CURRCONVRULE. Click on the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New External Company GL Control. Click on the Type button to find and select the External Company GL control type. When the global record is updated within the parent company. the selected fields update with information from the changed global record. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > Global Table 1. Set up external company records for each company you want to share data. 25. The Available Choices field populates with all of the fields in this table. Before you can define global tables. All of the fields move to the Selected Choices field. Define Global Tables You use the Detail sheet to indicate which fields and tables link from an external company to your new company. From the System drop-down list. 6. 3. You can link all or selected fields within a specific table. 26. 28. 2. A company receives data from other companies as long as an external company record is set up for the outside company. Use this program to define which global fields are linked when you integrate data from multiple companies. select the external company you previously created. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Highlight the first table. Navigate to the Multi-Company>GL Control>Detail sheet. 4. Click the Double-Right Arrow button. you must create an external company record within External Company Maintenance.700 . Repeat these steps within each company you want to communicate with other companies. select Multi-Company. Global Tables Use Global Table Maintenance to specify which fields update when global records are pulled into your current company.0. When you finish. 27. Repeat these steps for the rest of the multi-company tables. 62 Epicor ERP | 10. This indicates you are defining global tables for the multi-company function. Click on the Control button to find and select the new external company GL control you created previously. This process communicates via Service Bus. Setup Multi-Company Server Process To configure the Multi-Company Server Process (used with Service Bus) for ongoing processing. Before you do these steps. Only one process needs to run on your server. Clear the Continuous Processing check box. Verify the Recurring check box is selected. make sure an Interval Schedule is set up in System Agent Maintenance. 2. review the Verify an Interval Schedule earlier in this guide. however. you must initialize the Multi-Company Direct Server Process and set it to run on an Interval schedule. If for some reason you need to activate it.0. 3. select the Interval schedule that already exists. 4. review the Verify an Interval Schedule earlier in this guide. For more details. Multi-Company Server Process If your system uses Windows Azure™ Service Bus (the multiple companies reside on different databases). From the Schedule drop-down list. Setup Multi-Company Direct Server Process To configure the Multi-Company Direct Server Process for ongoing processing. you must define some options on this program. Click the Process button. For more details. This process causes the data within the outbound table from the sending company/site to update the inbound table within the receiving company/site. then restart the Task Agent. this process automatically moves data between all of the companies in your database which are involved in the multi-company setup. you must exit the Epicor application and run Recycle IIS Application Pool for the application server. Enter the Continuous Processing Delay value you need.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup Multi-Company Direct Server Process If your system is a Multi-Company or Multi-Site environment (the multiple companies/sites reside on the same database).700 63 . make sure an Interval schedule is available in System Agent Maintenance. This indicates the schedule runs automatically through a regular schedule. 5. A recommended value for handling larger database volumes is 10 minutes. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Server Process Epicor ERP | 10. within the Epicor Administration Console. you must define some options on this program. passing data out of one company into the tables of another company. you must initialize the Multi-Company Server Process and assign it to an interval schedule in the System Agent. Before you do these steps. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process 1. select the Interval schedule that already exists. Click OK to close this window. Click Actions > Initialize/Send Multi-Company G/L Accounts. click the External Company ID button. From the External System drop-down list. 4. When the initialization is complete. Before you can do the following steps. you initialize the global GL accounts. 2. 2. you must initialize the external companies within your parent company.0. By performing these steps. Initialize External Companies Once you configure either the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (Multi-Company/Multi-site environment) or the Multi-Company Server Process and have restarted Service Bus and the Epicor application (Multi-Site environment). Clear the Continuous Processing check box. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 4. This indicates the process runs automatically each time the Epicor application launches. Navigate to the External Company Configuration program within your parent company. The process will now launch each time you log into the Epicor application within the current database. 3. From the Schedule drop-down list.700 . however. 64 Epicor ERP | 10. and exchange rates you will share between the multiple companies. 5. If for some reason you need to activate it. a message displays. records. you must exit the Epicor application. Find and select the external company record you wish to initialize. The previous Multi-Company/Multi-Site Functionality Setup section describes the steps to recycle the IIS application pool. A recommended value for handling larger databases is 10 minutes. On the Detail > Company Information sheet. then restart the Task Agent. Initialize External Company Records You complete these tasks by launching a couple programs from the Actions menu. Enter the Continuous Processing Delay value you need. You will need to activate this process on each database within your Multi-Site environment. Verify the Recurring check box is selected. 1.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 1. you must create and configure the external company within External Company Configuration and External Company Configuration for both the parent company and the child companies. run Recycle IIS Application Pool for the application server. The external company record displays within this program. and verify Service Bus is running in the background. select Multi-Company (for a Multi-Site environment) or Multi-Company Direct (for a Multi-Company/Multi-site environment). 3. within the Epicor Administration Console. This indicates the schedule runs automatically through a regular schedule. Click the Process button. Tip To prevent changes to a global record from automatically updating the same record within the child companies. Epicor ERP | 10. When the initialization is complete. and currency records are global records shared between multiple companies. Link Global Records To complete the set up with your new parent or child company. You link global records by using the Customer Maintenance program in both the parent and the child companies. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. The Link Global Customer window displays. personalize each program's status bar to display the company name. You do this process by first indicating which records are global within the parent company. For information on how to leverage these features. Global Customers You first indicate which customers within the parent company are the global records you need to share with child companies. Now click Actions > Initialize Multi-Company Global Part/Customer/Supplier/Person Contact/Currency/Rate Group/Exchange Rates. click the Global Lock check box on the global record within the parent company. Click on the Actions menu and select Link Customer. You can also create unique styles for each company in your database. enter the customer records you need within the parent company. This indicates you want to make this customer record available across companies in your multi-company environment. You launch instances of this program within each company. and launch Customer Maintenance again. 6. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. click the Customer button to find and select the customer (or customers) you want to share between multiple companies. 2. review the previous Multi-Site Concepts section. Do this when the record needs to be different in multiple companies and you do not want changes made in the parent company to overwrite these setup records within the child companies. 3. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Customer 1. You then navigate to the child company (or companies).Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 5. Before you begin.0. You then navigate to each child company and link the global customer records. Launch Customer Maintenance with in the parent company. customer. rate type. When these global records are linked from the child companies to the parent company. The customer record displays on the tree view. On the Customer . 6. 4. Click OK to close this window. Tip To help you keep track of which company you are in. you indicate which specific supplier. Now return to the Main Menu. typically any change made to the record in the parent company will automatically update within the child companies. Any changes to this global record will not be sent to the receiving child companies. Select the Global check box. navigate to the child company. you then see immediately which company is active.700 65 . part. a message displays. 5. and pull in these global records.Detail sheet. The selected customer record(s) are linked to the parent company. Click the Actions menu and select Skipped. 11. 66 Epicor ERP | 10. 8. and launch Supplier Maintenance again. launch Customer Maintenance in the child company. Then run the Link Global Customer program again and display the global customer records in the grid. enter the supplier records you need within the parent company.New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 7. In either case. highlight it on the grid. The Link Global Supplier window displays. If the customer record exists in the child company. you then see immediately which company is active. personalize each program's status bar to display the company name.Detail sheet. If you do not want to link one of the records. You link global records by using the Supplier Maintenance program in both the parent and the child companies. Tip To help you keep track of which company you are in. The global record is no longer linked to the parent company. a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. click the Supplier button to find and select the supplier (or suppliers) you want to share between multiple companies.0. The selected records display within the Global Customers grid. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each customer record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 3. click the Actions menu again and select Link. You can also create unique styles for each company in your database. Global Suppliers You first indicate which suppliers within the parent company are the global records you need to share with child companies. 2. 5. Before you begin. 9. 6.700 . You then navigate to each child company and link the global supplier records. Select the Global check box. navigate to the child company. Repeat steps 5-11 on any other child companies that you want to use these global customer records. If the record does not exist. and select Unlink. Click on the Actions menu and select Link Supplier. This indicates you want to make this supplier record available across companies in your multi-company environment. Click on the Search button to find and select the customer records defined as global records. Highlight the customer record you want. The Skipped check box is selected on the customer record row. On the Supplier . click the Actions menu. a message box displays asking if you want to create the customer record. click Yes on these message boxes. Launch Supplier Maintenance with in the parent company. When a change is made to the record within the parent company. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. When you finish defining which customers you are skipping. 4. review the previous Multi-Site Concepts section. The supplier record displays on the tree view. 10. Tip If you ever want to unlink a global customer. You launch instances of this program within each company. For information on how to leverage these features. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Supplier 1. Now return to the Main Menu. that change also updates within the child company. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 7. Click on the Search button to find and select the supplier records defined as global records. The selected records display within the Global Suppliers grid. 8. If you do not want to link one of the records, highlight it on the grid. 9. Click the Actions menu and select Skipped. The Skipped check box is selected on the supplier record row. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each supplier record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 10. When you finish defining which suppliers you are skipping, click the Actions menu again and select Link. 11. If the supplier record exists in the child company, a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. If the record does not exist, a message box displays asking if you want to create the supplier record. In either case, click Yes on these message boxes. The selected supplier record(s) are linked to the parent company. When a change is made to the record within the parent company, that change also updates within the child company. Repeat steps 5-11 on any other child companies that you want to use these global supplier records. Tip If you ever want to unlink a global supplier, launch Supplier Maintenance in the child company. Then run the Link Global supplier program again and display the global supplier records in the grid. Highlight the supplier record you want, click the Actions menu, and select Unlink. The global record is no longer linked to the parent company. Global Parts You first indicate which parts within the parent company are the global records you need to share with child companies. You then navigate to each child company and link the global part records. Before you begin, enter the part records you need within the parent company. You link global records by using the Part Maintenance program in both the parent and the child companies. You launch instances of this program within each company. Menu Path: Production Management > Material Requirements Planning > Setup > Part 1. Launch Part Maintenance with in the parent company. 2. On the Part - Detail sheet, click the Part button to find and select the part (or parts) you want to share between multiple companies. The part record displays on the tree view. 3. Select the Global check box. This indicates you want to make this part record available across companies in your multi-company environment. 4. Select the warehouse and bin which will stock quantities for this part. Navigate to the Part>Detail>Warehouses tab to set up this information. 5. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 6. Now return to the Main Menu, navigate to the child company, and launch Part Maintenance again. Tip To help you keep track of which company you are in, personalize each program's status bar to display the company name. You can also create unique styles for each company in your database; you then see immediately which company is active. For information on how to leverage these features, review the previous The Multi-Site Concepts section. Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 67 New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 7. Navigate to the Integrations - Link Part sheet. 8. Click the Select Global Parts button to find and select the global parts available within the database. 9. If you do not want to link one of the records, highlight it on the grid. 10. Click the Skip button. The Skipped check box is selected on the part record row. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each part record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 11. When you finish defining which parts you are skipping, click the Link Selected button. 12. If the part record exists in the child company, a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. If the record does not exist, a message box displays asking if you want to create the part record. In either case, click Yes on these message boxes. The selected part record(s) are linked to the parent company. When a change is made to the record within the parent company, that change also updates within the child company. Repeat steps 5-11 on any other child companies that you want to use these global part records. Tip If you ever want to unlink a global part, launch Part Maintenance in the child company. Then navigate to the Integrations - Link Part sheet again. Highlight the part record you do not want to link and click the Unlink Selected button. The global record is no longer linked to the parent company. Global Currencies You first indicate which currencies within the parent company are the global records you need to share with child companies. You then navigate to each child company and link the global currency records. Before you begin, enter the currency records you need within the parent company. You link global records by using the Currency Maintenance program in both the parent and the child companies. You launch instances of this program within each company. Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Currency Master Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 1. Launch Currency Maintenance with in the parent company. 2. On the Currency - Detail sheet, click the Currency Code button to find and select the currency (or currencies) you want to share between multiple companies. The currency record displays on the tree view. 3. Select the Global check box. This indicates you want to make this currency record available across companies in your multi-company environment. 4. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 5. Now return to the Main Menu, navigate to the child company, and launch Currency Maintenance again. Tip To help you keep track of which company you are in, personalize each program's status bar to display the company name. You can also create unique styles for each company in your database; you then see immediately which company is active. For information on how to leverage these features, review the previous The Multi-Site Concepts section. 68 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 6. Navigate to the Currency - Link Currency sheet. 7. Click the Select Global Currencies button to find and select the global currencies available within the database. 8. If you do not want to link one of the records, highlight it on the grid. 9. Click the Skip button. The Skipped check box is selected on the currency record row. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each currency record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 10. When you finish defining which currencies you are skipping, click the Link Selected button. 11. If the currency record exists in the child company, a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. If the record does not exist, a message box displays asking if you want to create the currency record. In either case, click Yes on these message boxes. The selected currency record(s) are linked to the parent company. Repeat steps 5-11 on any other child companies that you want to use these global currency records. Unlike other global records however, currency records do not automatically update when a change is made to the global currency record. The global currency functionality is only for the installation of currencies within child companies. If a change is needed to a currency, you need to enter these changes manually within each child company. Tip If you ever want to unlink a global currency, launch Currency Maintenance in the child company. Then navigate to the Currency - Link Currency sheet again. Highlight the currency record you do not want to link and click the Unlink Selected button. The global record is no longer linked to the parent company. Global Currency Rate Types You first indicate which currency rate types within the parent company are the global records you need to share with child companies. You then navigate to each child company and link the global rate type records. Before you begin, enter the rate type records you need within the parent company. You link global records by using the Rate Type Maintenance program in both the parent and the child companies. You launch instances of this program within each company. Tip Do not confuse currency rate types with consolidation rate types and consolidation types. Currency rate types define the rules used to convert source and target currency pairs. You use consolidation rate types and consolidation types during multi-company consolidations. Consolidation rate types define how often balances are converted when a source book uses a different currency from an intermediate (consolidation) book. Consolidation types determine how these balances are calculated between the source book and the intermediate book. Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Rate Type 1. Launch Rate Type Maintenance with in the parent company. 2. On the Rate Type - Detail sheet, click the Code button to find and select the rate type (or rate types) you want to share between multiple companies. The rate type record displays on the tree view. 3. Select the Global check box. This indicates you want to make this rate type record available across companies in your multi-company environment. Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 69 New Company Setup Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 4. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 5. Now return to the Main Menu, navigate to the child company, and launch Rate Type Maintenance again. Tip To help you keep track of which company you are in, personalize each program's status bar to display the company name. You can also create unique styles for each company in your database; you then see immediately which company is active. For information on how to leverage these features, review the previous The Multi-Site Concepts section. 6. Navigate to the Link Rate Types sheet. 7. Click the Select Global Rate Types button to find and select the global rate types available within the database. 8. If you do not want to link one of the records, highlight it on the grid. 9. Click the Skip button. The Skipped check box is selected on the rate type record row. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each rate type record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 10. When you finish defining which rate types you are skipping, click the Link Selected button. 11. If the rate type record exists in the child company, a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. If the record does not exist, a message box displays asking if you want to create the rate type record. In either case, click Yes on these message boxes. The selected rate type record(s) are linked to the parent company. When a change is made to the record within the parent company, that change also updates within the child company. Repeat steps 5-11 on any other child companies that you want to use these global rate type records. Tip If you ever want to unlink a global rate type, launch Rate Type Maintenance in the child company. Then navigate to the Link Rate Type sheet again. Highlight the rate type record you do not want to link and click the Unlink Selected button. The global record is no longer linked to the parent company. Global GL Accounts To complete the master record setup, you also need to indicate which GL accounts are used across companies. Before you do this task, you need to generate your GL accounts. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account 1. Navigate to the parent company and launch General Ledger Account Maintenance using the path described above. 2. Click the Chart of Accounts drop-down list to find and select the COA you need to modify. Important Charts of accounts cannot be defined as global records. Only the GL accounts they contain can be defined as global records. 3. Click the GL Account button to find and select the account(s) you need to define as multi-company accounts. 4. The accounts you select display on the tree view. Highlight one of these accounts. 5. Select the Multi-Company check box. 70 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 700 71 . Repeat these steps on all the GL accounts you need within the parent company. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 8. Navigate to the child companies which consolidate with these COAs and define the multi-company accounts you need.0. Epicor ERP | 10.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide New Company Setup 6. 7. 5. along with Windows Azure™ Service Bus ) is set up and running before you begin to set up consolidated purchasing. 4. launch Customer Maintenance. This values defines the total credit amount available for this customer for all the companies within your organization. you can leverage the multi-site financial processes. a credit hold warning message displays that prevents you from creating the sales order.700 . If you include sales orders. pending amounts on open sales orders are added to the AR invoice total to calculate the current credit total. Within the parent company. Tip If a zero is displayed in this field. You can include open sales orders and payment instruments (non-traditional payments. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Customer 2. the customer record is placed on credit hold. these items are factored to calculate the total available credit for that customer. Global Customer Credit Use the Global Customer Credit functionality to create and enforce a credit limit for a specific customer for all companies within your organization. This section documents these processes -. Subsidiary (child) companies can then link to this global customer record and begin placing sales orders against it. Select the Global check box. the credit limit reaches zero or lower. the global customer record monitors the credit available to this specific customer. these amounts are added to the credit amount. Either find and select an existing customer record or create a new record on the Customer>Detail sheet. such as post dated checks and bank drafts) in this calculation.0. Navigate to the Billing>Credit>Detail sheet. As you create AR invoices and receive payments. If at any point. Enter the Global Credit Limit for this customer. 72 Epicor ERP | 10. You can apply credit limits for global customer records.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes After you finish setting up your multi-site environment. the amounts on each AR invoice are subtracted from the available amount. Verify that the Multi-Company Server Direct Process (or Multi-Company Server Process. If you include payment instruments. As payments are received. As AR invoices are created against the global customer record. Whenever you try to create a new sales order for the global customer. Global Customer Credit . The global credit functionality includes a couple options for calculating the global credit amount. You leverage this functionality by first setting up credit limits on the global customer record within Customer Maintenance. the customer has no credit limit ceiling. 3.Setup You set up the global customer credit functionality within External Company Configuration and Customer Maintenance. 1.detailing what they do and the steps you follow in order to run them. Navigate to External Company Configuration. 16. 13. You can also select the Include PI check box. you cannot edit this field. Epicor ERP | 10. 9. From the External System drop-down list. 10. These payment instruments are pulled from all the external companies that have conducted transactions with this customer. Important This field is only enabled if the Transfer Method you use is Direct. 8. the Global PI Credit Limit field is available. and use it in calculating a customer's global credit limit. The application adds this amount to the current AR balance to calculate the Global Credit Total. the customer is not on credit hold. 17. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. the customer has unlimited credit. Repeat steps 15-17 on all the external companies you want linked to global customer records. Now click on the Actions menu again and select Initialize Multi-Company Global Part/Customer/Supplier/Currency/Rate Group/Exchange Rates. 14. Tip If your company created this customer record. When selected. 19. it indicates this current customer is on credit hold and no sales orders can be created for this customer. 15. Use this field to enter a credit limit value for payment instruments like post dated checks or bank drafts. Tip If a zero is displayed in this field. Repeat steps 3-10 to enter or update the global credit on all of the customers you need. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. select Multi-Company Direct. When the initialization is complete.0.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 6. If your company did not create this customer record. 11. Click OK to close this window. a message displays. 18. you can change Global Credit Hold status on this customer. If the Global Credit Hold displays a warning message. When this field is blank. 12.700 73 . Navigate to a child company and launch Customer Maintenance again. Either find and select an existing external company record or create a new record. Optionally select the Include Open Orders check box. Click on the Global Currency drop-down list to select the currency this customer uses. this check box indicates that the application also uses open sales orders as well as AR invoices to determine the current global credit rating for this customer. All companies linked to this global customer record will receiving a warning message stating the customer is on credit hold. only the customer’s current AR balance is compared to the global credit limit value. If the customer is connected to an external financial system and you have selected the Include PI check box. 7. If this check box is clear. this check box indicates you wish to receive non-traditional payment information (Payment Instruments) such as post dated checks and bank drafts. When selected. The Skipped check box is selected on the customer record row. customer. The two companies must both use the Epicor application and be set up for inter-company trading. Click the Actions menu and select Skipped. The supplier company can either make purchase suggestions back to the customer company. In either case. or turn the ICPO into a sales order for processing.700 . The global customers are now linked to the parent global record. Click on the Actions menu and select Link Customer. The companies involved in the inter-company trading relationship can then create inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs) which originate in the customer company and are received automatically by the supplier company. 24. click the Actions menu again and select Link. To do this. 21. and external company records to define the relationship. Inter-Company Purchase Orders . you can automatically generate sales orders from an inter-company purchase order. If you do not want to link one of the records. a message box displays asking if you want to create the customer record. If the customer record exists in the child company. Inter-Company Purchase Orders You can create Inter-Company Purchase Orders (ICPOs) and suggestions between multiple companies within your database. Repeat these steps to assign the Skipped status to each customer record you do not want to globally link within the current company. 25.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 20. 23. supplier. the global credit limit is calculated.Setup To set up inter-company trading. highlight it on the grid. 26. When you finish defining which customers you are skipping. repeat steps 19-25. Click on the Search button to find and select the customer records defined as global records. a message box displays asking if you want to link the record. The selected records display within the Global Customers grid. The Link Global Customer window displays. Navigate to other child companies to link these global customer records.0. Companies that use the Epicor application can also send ICPO Suggestions to another company that uses the Epicor application. As AR invoices and. 22. Inter-Company Trading You use the Inter-Company Trading functionality to set up supplier-customer relationships between companies within your organization. If the record does not exist. 74 Epicor ERP | 10. you need to create terms. Verify that the Multi-Company Direct Server process is set up and running before you begin setting up the inter-company purchase order process. open sales orders are placed against this customer record. As long as the PO was created in the Epicor application and sent electronically. click Yes on these message boxes. You do this by setting up your companies as customer and supplier records and then linking them through external company records. restricting new sales orders as needed. optionally. Verify that the Code values are the same. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Purchasing Terms 3. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Customer 9. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 13. launch Terms Maintenance. review the Terms Maintenance topics.0. 11. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Supplier Epicor ERP | 10. This value indicates this customer record (for the internal company) is available for inter-company trading. Each price list must be entered manually. Navigate to one of the trading partner companies. Add more details to the customer record as you need. 12. Continue to add more internal companies as inter-company trading customers. 15. 2. Navigate to the Billing-Detail sheet. These values need to be the same as the values you entered for the purchasing terms. Set up the customer records you need. Be sure to create a customer record for the current company as well if the current company will be purchasing goods from other companies. When you finish. attach the price list you need to each customer record. For the Customer ID value. 10. be sure you enter the identifier for the company defined within the Epicor Administration Console. To create the selling terms. Click New on the Standard toolbar and enter the parameters you need for the selling terms. Select the IC Trader check box. Launch Customer Maintenance. You first create identical purchase and selling terms for the two companies.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 1. Tip If you use price lists. 7. Select the AR (selling) Terms you will use with this customer record. review the Purchase Terms Maintenance topics. 14. 5. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Terms 6. Be sure to use the same selling terms you created previously. these identifier values must be the same for the inter-company trading to be complete. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click New on the Standard toolbar and enter the parameters you need for the purchasing terms. Create a customer record for the company for which the current company will do trades. Now launch Supplier Maintenance. 4.700 75 . Tip For details on each selling terms field. Launch Purchase Terms Maintenance. This internal company can now be used on sales orders. 8. Tip For details on each purchasing terms field. Sales Order Entry. select the Enable check box. enter the external company identifier within the Supplier ID field. enter the external company identifier. This value defines the number of days required to transfer an order from one company to the other company involved in the inter-company trade. Either create a new external company record or find and select an existing one. If this external company will supply products with the current company. Enter the Transfer Days to External Company value you need. 20. purchase terms. and the ICPO programs to create and modify inter-company purchases between these partner companies. click Save on the Standard toolbar. You can now create internal company purchase orders for this internal company. You can now generate inter-company purchase orders and suggestions between these two companies.0. 21. 27. Be sure these price lists are the same as the customer price lists you added to the customer records. and the current company identifier within the Partner Customer ID field. When you finish. 24. You can now create sales orders using this internal company. In the Customer ID field. Be sure to create a supplier record for the current company as well if the current company will be purchasing goods from other companies. Select the IC Trader check box. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 22. attach the price list you need to each supplier record. and selling terms identifiers are the same as those you defined in the first company. 25. For the Supplier ID value. supplier. enter the current company identifier. 19. price lists. Navigate to the other company involved in the inter-company trade partnership and repeat these steps. Now define the inter-company trading relationship between this external company and the current company. Navigate to External Company Maintenance. Create a supplier record for the company for which the current company will do trades. Tip If you use price lists. This internal company can now be used on purchase orders. Within the Inter-Company Trading area. 18. This value indicates this supplier record (for the internal company) is available for inter-company trading.700 . Likewise in the Partner Supplier ID field. be sure you enter the identifier for the company defined within the Epicor Administration Console. Make sure the customer. Complete the inter-company trading relationship. Continue to add more internal companies as inter-company trading suppliers. Add more details to the supplier record as you need. 76 Epicor ERP | 10. 17. Be sure to use the same purchasing terms you created previously. 26. These purchase orders may also be turned into sales orders to complete the inter-company trade. Use Purchase Order Entry. The rest of the fields in this area activate. 23.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 16. 28. Select the AP (purchase) Terms you will use with this supplier record. you must set up the records described in the Inter-Company Purchase Orders . a user navigates to Sales Order Entry. If the sales company purchasing the item has multiple plants. however. Before you can use this functionality. 8. The supplying company receives an ICPO from the sales company (which is considered a customer of the supplying company). line detail. 6. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Purchase Order Entry 2. this person clicks the Actions menu and select Accept All. and another internal company supplies the item being resold. Fill in the header. Optionally. 3. which in turn resells the item to the end user. Within the supplying company. This value is on the Releases > Detail sheet. the supplying company generates a sales order from the ICPO. The label for this check box changes to Approved. 4. If the user wishes to turn an ICPO suggestion into a sales order. Important This user must not select the Global PO check box.Process This topic describes how you create a purchase suggestion and then turn it into an inter-company purchase order at a supplying company. the selling user can select the Warehouse that will receive this part quantity. The user reviews the suggestions. When this happens. The user in the supplying company clicks on the Actions menu and selects Incoming to Linked ICPO Suggestions. If there is inadequate supply. The selling user (a user within the sales company) creates a new purchase order to purchase the item from the supplying company. Epicor ERP | 10. this person selects its Ready for Order check box.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Inter-Company Purchase Orders . 5. so the quantity received through the inter-company PO can only be received by the plant selected in this field.0. The selling user approves the purchase order by navigating to the Summary sheet and clearing the Unapproved check box.Setup topic. The Incoming ICPO Suggestions program displays. Tip The user can also ignore a suggestion by clicking the Reject check box. If the user wishes to turn all of these suggestions into sales orders. Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > General Operations > Order Entry Tip The CRM menu path is: Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > General Operations > Order Entry 7. which in turn generates a sales order for the customer company. and releases information. This check box is used for the consolidated purchasing process. the sales company must purchase it from the other company (which is considered a supplier to the sales company). 9. Within the sales (customer) company. fulfills the demand and then sells/ships it to the sales company. 1. This plant value validates the inter-company receipt. Example A sales company sells an item to an end user (external customer). the selling user selects the Plant that will receive each PO release quantity. a user navigates to Purchase Order Entry.700 77 . Available options: • Cancel . When the user finishes accepting and rejecting the ICPO suggestions. • Increase .0. This shipment record is automatically sent to the sales (customer) company. To complete the change.Delays the suggestion for a time. The user at the customer company clicks on the Actions menu and selects Add Intercompany Receipt. The user at the customer company that purchased the item launches Receipt Entry.700 . An AP invoice can now be created to complete the inter-company transaction. 21. the user launches AR Invoice Entry. This user then clicks on the Actions menu and selects Send All Suggestions. • Reduce . This person can accept the suggestion as it is. Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Customer Shipment Entry 22. This user makes any changes to the suggestion for the sales order and clicks Save. 78 Epicor ERP | 10. The user closes the Incoming ICPO Suggestions program. 14. 13. 17. • Expedite . The ICPO is now a sales order. 16. 23. 26.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 10. This user generates the packing slip for the shipment and selects the Shipped check box. the user either clicks the Accept button or clicks the Actions menu and selects Accept. 18. The Send ICPO Suggestions program displays.Ignores the suggestion. 12.Requests activity be initiated on the ICPO suggestion sooner than originally planned.Adds more quantity to the suggestion. The supplying company then receives the change. The supplying company company can begin fulfilling the order as requested. The linked sales order updates with the new purchasing information. A user within the customer company then launches Purchase Order Entry. If the user wants to make changes to this sales order. The user clicks on the Sales Order button to find and select the sales order linked to an ICPO. The suggestion is sent to the sales (customer) company. Menu Path: Material Management > Shipping / Receiving > General Operations > Receipt Entry 24. 25. Back at the supplying company. • Postpone . 11. or makes changes to it. This user clicks the Actions menu and selects Change PO Suggestions. however. this person clicks the Actions menu and select Suggestions to Linked PO. 19. this person clicks the Actions menu and selects Process All Suggestions. 15.Subtracts quantity from the suggestion. The user within the supplying company launches Customer Shipment Entry. The user pulls at the customer company in the purchase order and closes it. The user review the changes. 20. 3. If this external company will supply products with the current company.Indicates you want this external company to send AR invoices to the current company. select the Enable check box. AP Invoice Automation . 5. This value defines the number of days required to transfer an order from one company to the other company involved in the inter-company trade. Within one of the trading partner companies. Within the Inter-Company Trading area. You can optionally automatic the AP invoice required for this inter-company transaction. An AP invoice is automatically created for the purchasing company and an AR invoice is automatically created for the selling company. Verify that the Multi-Company Direct Server process is set up and running before you begin setting up the AP invoice automation process. Review the AP Invoice Automation topics for more information. the selling user clicks on the Actions menu. AP Invoice Automation You can automate creating AP invoices for an inter-company trading transaction. You can now create sales orders using this internal company. 31. 4. 30. This person selects the packing slip and pulls the shipping data into the new AR invoice. 28. 7. Next. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 2.Setup This topic details how you set up automatic AP invoice generation for inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs). 29. highlights the Get sub-menu and selects Get Shipment. The user posts the invoice. Now define the inter-company trading relationship between this external company and the current company. enter the external company identifier. In the Customer ID field. Select the check boxes you need to define how you want these inter-company trading companies to generate invoices.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > General Operations > Invoice Entry 27. enter the external company identifier within the Supplier ID field. You now need to complete the inter-company trading relationship. You can now create internal company purchase orders for this internal company. Enter the Transfer Days to External Company value you need. 1. The user completes the AR invoice and then selects the Calculate Taxes check box. Epicor ERP | 10. This user creates a new invoice. The rest of the fields in this area activate. Available options: • Send AR Invoices -. enter the current company identifier. Either create a new external company record or find and select an existing one. navigate to External Company Maintenance. 6. Likewise in the Partner Supplier ID field.700 79 .0. and the current company identifier within the Partner Customer ID field. In the Central Payment section. First. Be sure to select the same company identifier on all the companies who will use the central payment functionality. Central AP Invoice Payment Your organization can use the Central AP Invoice Payment functionality to pay for subsidiary AP invoices at the corporate (parent) level. or child. 8. • Receive AP Invoices -. level.Indicates you want this external company to receive AP invoices from the current company. For this process to work correctly. as all AP invoices flow through the main (parent) company.700 . 9. The corporate parent then has greater control over the AP process throughout your organization. They also need to follow the same fiscal period schedule. company. Central AP Invoice Payment . The subsidiary then posts the invoice. select the Parent Company from the options on this drop-down list. • Send AP Invoices -. An adjustment transaction is also placed against the original AP invoice at the subsidiary that changes the total amount due on it to zero. The invoice created within the corporate (parent) company will pull in the invoice header information (including dates and discount information) and have a single detail line that contains the total payment amount due.0.Setup This topic describes how you set up the Central AP Invoice Payment functionality.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Receive AR Invoices -. this invoice is also selected as a Central Payment. Launch Company Configuration in the parent and child companies. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration 2. the corporate (parent) and subsidiary (child) companies must all use the same parent company database and currency. Navigate to the other companies involved within inter-company trading and repeat these steps. Lastly.Indicates you want this external company to send AP invoices to the current company. This flow of the AP data begins at the subsidiary. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 3. 80 Epicor ERP | 10.Indicates you want this external company to receive AR invoices from the current company. Now when an inter-company purchase order transaction is complete between the two companies. Navigate to the Modules>Finance>Accounts Payable sheet. If the Central Payment check box is clear (not selected) on an AP invoice. any centrally paid supplier must defined as a global supplier and linked to all the companies involved in the central payment. Tip The child company is not forced to pay each AP invoice through central payment processing. This identifier defines the company record which will process the central payments. the subsidiary company creates an AP invoice to pay a supplier. and the Epicor application automatically sends the AP invoice to the corporate. the child company handles payment for this invoice internally. 1. or parent. an AR invoice is generated within the selling company and an AP invoice is generated in the purchasing company. Important You must use the same Invoice Group Prefix and Legal Number values in all the external company records. The Central Payment functionality is now ready to use. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. From the External System drop-down list.Setup topic. 8. Launch External Company Configuration in the parent and child companies.700 81 .0. 6. 5. Navigate to the Detail>Multi-Company sheet. Before you can use this functionality. 10. Each supplier record can now be linked to the subsidary companies. This check box is located on either the Summary or the Header-Detail sheets. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Supplier 12. Epicor ERP | 10. you indicate the supplier record will use this functionality. By selecting the Central Payment check box. The invoice is now recorded in your database. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > General Operations > Invoice Entry 2. 11. 13. define the Invoice Group Prefix you for all the central payments. Within the Central Payment section. select Multi-Company Direct. select the Legal Number method these central payments will use. Use the Link Global Supplier functionality to pull in the global supplier record within each subsidary (child) company's database. Create an invoice and select the Central Payment check box. Save the invoice. 3. 15. 7. Optionally. Navigate to Supplier Maintenance in the subsidary companies.Process This topic describes how you create central payments within your organization. Enter records for the suppliers who your organization will use for central payments. you must set up the records described in the Central AP Invoice Payment . Navigate to AP Invoice Entry within any company. 9. 1. Any AP invoice groups (or batches) will now generate using these characters as a prefix value. 14. Select the Global and Central Payment check boxes on each supplier record. Either find an existing external company record or create a new one. Return to the central payment (parent) company. Central AP Invoice Payment .Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 4. Navigate to Supplier Maintenance. • AP Invoice Tracker . 7.This program lets you see the source company that originally created the AP invoice. Check Date. 5. this transaction indicates the transfer between the subsidiary (child) and the corporate (parent) locations.Run this report to review the transactions within your journals. Transaction Details This topic describes the transactions which update with the central AP payment.Invoice Detail and Invoice Payment Selection topics. Find and select the original AP invoice.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 4. Tracking and Reporting You can review the progress of central payments through the programs described on this topic. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > General Operations > Payment Entry AP Payment Entry . This memo contains the Check Number.Use this program to display any AP invoice . 8. The payment ( PAY) and adjustment ( ADJ) transaction types complete the audit trail: • PAY-ITC . • Journal Listing Report . Navigate to the Invoice Detail > Detail sheet to see the Source Company who initially created the AP invoice. You can filter this report to only display intercompany journal transactions. this account records the transaction instead of the AP Control account (the account used on AP invoices paid directly by the subsidiary location). Although you can create the AP invoice in any database. Create a payment for the AP invoice. Navigate to the company which initially created the AP invoice and launch AP Invoice Entry. For more information. Launch AP Payment Entry. For more information. and Current Balance from the central payment.0. For more information. so the same central AP invoice fields display on it. The transactions will be recorded within the corporate location's Inter-Company AP account. The subsidiary will likewise use its Inter-Company AP account. read the Aged Payables Report topic. ) 10. 6.The transaction for an adjustment to an intercompany transfer central payment. only the parent company can make payments against this invoice.Use this report to filter the aging by the source company that originally created the AP invoices. review the AP Payment Entry . Select and display the memo which was automatically generated by the central payment.700 . review the Journal Listing topic. The Inter-Company Transfer ( ICT) transaction is used to record all central AP payments. The tracker is essentially a read-only version of AP Invoice Entry.The transaction for an intercompany transfer central payment. 82 Epicor ERP | 10.including invoices that are being paid centrally. Navigate to the parent company. Click the Memo ( button on the Standard toolbar. • ADJ-ITC . 9. • Aged Payables Report . They can then use these PO numbers to create purchase orders independent from consolidated purchasing.700 83 . You can set aside a block of PO numbers for each child receiving company. 4. • Purchase suggestions for centrally purchased items are consolidated at corporate using IMtable (Intermediate Table) integration. Consolidated purchasing features: • It can run between companies within the same database (multi-company environment) or separate databases (multi-site environment). You need to define the central purchasing company (parent) and the receiving companies (children) involved in consolidating purchases. Launch External Company Configuration to establish external company IDs for each receiving company involved in your consolidated purchasing process. even though companies may exist on separate servers and databases.Setup Perform the following setup steps to use the consolidated purchasing functionality. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Consolidated Purchasing Consolidated purchasing (which requires the Multi-Site Management license) controls purchasing and AP functions across multiple companies.0. the central purchasing company can then assign a new block of PO numbers to the receiving child company. purchase order suggestions can be grouped across companies for optimal pricing and adherence to approved suppliers. You can review global requirements and create global purchase orders that split off to the separate companies and sites for receipt. • Consolidated purchase orders can contain multiple lines for different receiving companies. • Consolidated purchase orders will be sent to the receiving company so receipts are created. select Multi-Company Direct. You also need to define global supplier and part records. Additionally. 3. 1. which in turn is generated by the central purchasing company. 2. From the External System drop-down list. • Receiving (child) companies can create purchase demand. Implementing consolidated purchasing does not prevent the child receiving companies from creating their own purchase orders. 5. Navigate to the central purchasing (parent) company. Verify that the Multi-Company Direct Server process is set up and running before you begin setting up consolidated purchasing. Either find an existing external company record or create a new one in External Company Maintenance first. When the child company has used up its block of PO numbers. Epicor ERP | 10. • Consolidated purchasing parts defined at part class level enables companies to purchase some product locally and others centrally. Navigate to the Multi-Company > Detail sheet. Consolidated Purchasing . Define the following items on this central purchasing (parent) external company record: • External site -. including Name. When a user creates a PO that uses 150. Lastly. The central purchasing company assigns PO numbers 116-155 as the block. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Buyer 8. This value defines the point at which the central purchasing company will assign more purchase order numbers to this receiving company. This value indicates how many POs this child company can create on their own. 13. Available options: • PONum Reorder Point .700 . PO Limit. 14.The point at which the application warns the central purchasing company that this receiving company is at or near its PONum Reorder Point limit. 11. which you define as 10. • PONum Block Size . 7. Be sure to select the Consolidated Purchasing check box on each record. You then enter the PONum Warning Point value. 9. review the Buyer Maintenance topics. 12.Enter the identifier. The consolidated buyer is set up within the central purchasing company. address and other information for the site which will receive the purchased goods. You now create the buyer records for the individuals involved in the consolidated purchasing process. Enter the primary information you need for this person. Now navigate to each child company and launch Buyer Maintenance. You indicate the West Blue company can have 40 PO numbers available within its PONum Block Size value. Launch Buyer Maintenance. 84 Epicor ERP | 10. Define the Consolidated Purchasing options. Tip For specific information about these fields and functions. When a user creates a purchase order with a number of 145. 10. The cental purchasing company then needs to give this child receiving company more PO numbers for independent purchases. • PONum Warning Point . Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Only set up an external company record for the central purchasing company. and other options. you enter a PONum Reorder Point value of 5.0.Each child receiving company has a set amount of purchase order numbers available at any given time for independent purchases. Continue to add as many buyer records as you need. Navigate to each child company again and launch External Company Maintenance. ensuring unique numbers are created for each purchase order. Be sure to also define the specific users authorized to make purchases for this buyer. This check box indicates the buyer record will be used on consolidated purchase orders.The amount of new purchase order numbers that the central purchasing company will assign to this receiving company when the external company reaches its PONum Reorder Point. Example You set up an external company record for the West Blue company and configure the consolidated purchasing functionality. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. Email Address. the central purchasing company gives West Blue a new set of 40 PO numbers. Create identical buyer records within each child company.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 6. name. a warning message alerts the user that the available PO numbers are running out. Selected the Consolidated Purchasing check box. name. Because you are in the central purchasing company. Launch this program. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. By setting up the external site and warehouse. All of the currencies available within this company display on this list. Use the Link Global Suppliers and Select Global Parts functionality to pull in these global records within each receiving company. each receiving company can now create purchasing demand which the central purchasing company can turn into purchase order releases. Select the Purchasing Company you need. Launch both Supplier Maintenance and Part Maintenance.700 85 . address and other information for the warehouse within the external site which will receive the purchased goods. The Consolidated Purchasing check box indicates the global supplier records can be for creating consolidated purchase orders. Create the purchase part records you want to share with each receiving company. you can select the Consolidated Purchasing check box on each part class within Part Class Maintenance. select this company ID. 20. Repeat steps 3-5.Enter the identifier. Click the Save button on the Standard toolbar. Select the currency that will be used for the purchase orders from the Global Currency Code drop-down list. Return to the central purchasing (parent) company and launch Supplier Maintenance. All global parts linked to that part class will now be available for consolidated purchasing. The Consolidated Purchasing check box indicates the global part records can be for creating consolidated purchase orders. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Supplier 22. Tip Alternately. Now launch Company Configuration within the central purchasing (parent) company. Navigate to a folder which contains Part Maintenance. Epicor ERP | 10. 19. Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Part Tip The CRM menu path is: Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Part 24. 18. 15. 17. 26. 21. Navigate to the Modules > Materials > Purchase sheet. 23. selecting the same Purchasing Company and Global Currency Code values.0. Select both the Global and the Consolidated Purchasing check boxes on each supplier record.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes • External Warehouse -. Create the supplier records you want to share with each receiving company. Select both the Global and the Consolidated Purchasing check boxes on each part record. 16. 25. Now navigate to each receiving company. Navigate to each receiving company and launch Company Configuration. When approved and saved. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 7. For example. The Generate Suggestions process is run. Create the consolidated purchase order. Define the specific receiving company. 4. and Global Warehouse drop-down lists to define these values. site. Select New Consolidated PO. it also designates that each release on the PO will ship to a specific receiving company. The New Purchase Suggestions window displays. Consolidated purchase orders generate and take into account demand created in each of the children (receiving) companies. At this time. In the parent company. personnel in children companies can use Purchase Order Entry to view the purchase order created in the parent company. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions Note Running Generate Purchasing Suggestions to generate consolidated purchases orders is only required if personnel in children companies have created demand transactions. Global Site. Select the Unapproved check box. You do this on the Release > Detail sheet. Click on the Global Company. 12. Create the releases you need for each line. a production manager in a child company requires a particular global consolidated purchased part in the manufacture of an assembly. PO managers in the parent company launch Purchase Order Entry again. 86 Epicor ERP | 10.Process This topic documents the consolidating purchasing process. Continue to make other consolidated purchase orders as you need. and warehouse which will receive the quantity on each release. The user selects the Regenerative radio option and the Run Consolidated Purch check box. 10.700 . When you finish setting up the releases on the consolidated PO. so he created a sales order for the item. Within the central purchasing (parent) company. 5.0. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Purchase Order Entry 2. launch Purchase Order Entry. 8. 11. 6. the Multi-Company process (if running continually in the background) retrieves the consolidated. navigate to the Generate Purchasing Suggestions program to generate consolidated purchase orders that take into account any demand transactions created in children (receiving) companies. 9. indicating this purchase order will be used across companies. 3. Note that the Global PO check box is automatically selected.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide You have now set up consolidating purchasing within your multi-company or multi-site environment. indicate the purchase order is a valid expense. Consolidated Purchasing . The check box label now displays Approved.Setup topic. you must set up consolidated purchasing as described in the Consolidated Purchasing . Click on the Down Arrow next to the New button. click on the Actions menu and select New Purchase Suggestions. 1. PO. Before you can do this process. Enter the Header and Line details. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 13. These users should only be receiving the goods listed on the consolidated purchase orders that are destined for their respective companies. The releases on the purchase order generated for each receiving company are sent to each specific company. A user at the central purchasing company creates the AP invoice and sends portions to the individual receiving companies (as an un-posted invoice in a batch) for payment.700 87 . they clear the Unapproved check box and save the PO. 17. you must define inter-company journals for the parent and subsidiary companies. You typically use multi-company journals to divide the balance of an expense account across multiple companies.0. For this functionality to work. 14. You can set up multi-company journals to distribute amounts from a GL journal in the parent company to specific journals within one or more child companies. Note Consolidated purchase orders generated in the parent company cannot. AP allocations automatically distribute expense amounts across the inter-company accounts. Distribute these allocations across the accounts within the chart of accounts (COA) for a subsidiary company. They can add miscellaneous charges and generate sales forecasts from this purchase order. PO managers (in the parent company) review the consolidated purchase orders that have been generated. or to one or more subsidiary (child) companies. You then launch AP Invoice Entry within the receiving child companies to distribute these expense amounts on AP invoices. Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations Use the Multi-Company Journals and AP Allocations functionality to distribute amounts from a parent company to one or more subsidiary (child) companies. Tip This functionality is similar to AP allocations. Multi-Company Journals Use multi-company journal processing to simultaneously post a journal from a parent company to one or more journals within the current company. PO managers within each of the receiving companies can view the consolidated purchase orders generated in the parent company in their list of open purchase orders. You also create multi-company journals and distribute the amounts among the multi-company journals. and should not be maintained by users in children companies. 15. When ready. 16. The Epicor application sends the receipt records each receiving company enters to the central purchasing company. they click the Actions menu and select Generate Purchase Orders. When configured. Use this multi-company functionality in AP Invoice Entry on the GL Analysis sheet. Multi-company AP allocations are set up in a similar way. The PO managers find and select the purchase order. The receiving companies record the purchased part quantities they receive through the consolidated purchase order. Epicor ERP | 10. and external company records so that each company can receive inter-company journal transactions. Both multi-company transaction types can distribute amounts across companies that use different base currency records as long as each company involved in the transaction has the same rate type definitions and conversion rules. You do this by setting up multi-company GL accounts that distribute during the posting process. The purchase order now displays within PO Entry. 700 . and currency values used to record these journals. In GL Journal Entry. The journals only transfer from the main book at the parent company to a book in the target child company. 88 Epicor ERP | 10. These transactions are automatically sent out to the subsidiary (child) companies. The updated financial information displays through the Journal Tracker and the Journal Listing report. You can run GL allocations on these entries. These journal entries are then posted to the general ledger. fiscal calendar. The GL control attached to these transactions must use the External Company GL control type in order to define the required inter-company journal context. The group entry mode used within the target company defines the COA. using the values from the single book which received them. the mode it uses depends on the number of books which exist in the target company. If the target company has multiple books. the transferred journals display in Multi-Book Mode.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide The flow of the data begins at the corporate (parent) location.0. and use the values defined in the configuration of the target company. the transferred journals display as journals in Single Book Mode. where they are then incorporated directly into the subsidiary journals. enter transactions into the inter-company journal. If the target company only has one book. Setup To set up the Multi-Company Journal process.0.700 89 . Also make sure you have configured the External Company GL control type and its GL controls to handle multi-company journal functionality. you must define some options within the setup programs described on this topic.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Company Journals . Epicor ERP | 10. Verify that the Multi-Company Server Direct Process is set up and running before you begin defining multi-company journals. 6. Navigate to Journal Entry. Before you can use this functionality. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 2. This external company can now receive GJ allocations from the parent company to its multi-company journals. 4. Next. Use the Group ID field to identify the group on reports. and other programs.Process This topic describes how you use multi-company journal allocations within your organization. 4. 90 Epicor ERP | 10. Tip Use specific numbers to make it easy to find journal entries during an audit. trackers. Select either the Single-Book and Multi-Book options. 10. 3.0. Select the Allow GJ Allocations to check box. Select the same COA and indicate the same accounts are multi-company accounts. 3. Click the GL Account button to find and select the accounts you want to define as multi-company accounts. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Journal Entry 2. Select the Multi-Company check box on each account. 5. navigate to other companies and create external company records which allow general ledger allocations. You can now automatically distribute amounts from a single GL account to one or more other GL accounts in a subsidiary (child) COA. 7. Launch General Ledger Account Maintenance in the other companies that will receive GJ allocations. select Multi-Company Direct. Create an external company record for a company you want to interact with the current company record. Continue to create other external company records for the current company as you need.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 1. From the External System drop-down list. Launch External Company Maintenance within a company you wish to use general ledger allocations. Launch General Ledger Account Maintenance in one of the companies. you must set up the records described in the Multi-Company Journals Setup topic. 9. Click New. selecting the Allow GJ Allocations to check box on each record. 1. Multi-Company Journals . You can also use the employee name or a date to help organize the groups. Select the Chart of Accounts (COA) which is shared across all companies. Navigate to the Multi-Company>Detail sheet. they determine the entry mode for journals in the group. 11.700 . Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account 8. These options do the following: • Reverse -. In the Apply Date field. The apply date of the journal group supplies the field default. 11. you next need to select a book in the adjacent field. In the Rate Type field. called red storno in Russia. selecting a currency rate type for a journal overrides the default currency rate type defined for the group. select New Journal.Creates a journal with reversing amounts. In Russia. You can use the default apply date or enter a date in any other period. enter the default journal code for journals in this group. the journal contains a positive debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original entry decreased the account balance. In the Journal field. and COA of a selected book as default values for journal entry in the group. As described previously. enter the default apply date for journals in the group. 7.Uses the fiscal calendar. the default date falls in the period which immediately follows the period for the original journal. 5. Reversing journals require that you enter an apply date for the reversal in the adjacent field. The application creates a number to identify the journal and a legal number (if legal numbering is configured for manual journals). Use the Description field to identify the journal. Use the Reverse and Red Storno options to create a reversing journal. the application uses the currency rate type defined on the journal to convert the amount.Creates a journal which posts debit amounts equal to the credit amounts on the original journal and credit amounts equal to the debit amounts on the original journal. You can use a different apply date to individual journals if the date falls in the same fiscal period. When this occurs. currency. The application determines the period to which group the journals post based on the default calendar and the selected apply date. Create a different journal group to post journals to another fiscal period. enter the default currency rate type applied to journals in the group. Select this option if each company (the journal entering company and the external company) uses multiple books. From the New menu. In the Rate Type field. You can use the default apply date or enter a date in any Epicor ERP | 10.0. this value overrides the default rate type for the group. You can also apply a different currency rate type to individual journals. Tip Currency rate types apply exchange rates and conversion rules to journal amounts. The company's fiscal calendar and currency and the Master COA provide defaults for entry of the journals. enter the journal apply date. You can enter dates within the fiscal period to which the journal posts. 10. • Multi-Book -. 8. • Red Storno -. This value determines the default currency rate type used against all the journals in the group. this mode is called ordinary storno. You can use journal codes to locate the journals in reports and trackers. enter the currency rate type used to convert journal amounts.Uses company options as defaults for journal entry in the group. In the Apply Date field. right-click in the field and select Spelling from the context menu. 9. This type of journal contains a negative debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original journal increased the account balance. 6. After you select this option.700 91 . To check the spelling of the description.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes These options do the following: • Single-Book -. Select this option if each company (the journal entering company and the external company) only has one book. 12. When you are asked if you are ready to post. 18.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide other period. 19. 13. This field designates the account to which the detail amount posts. Multi-company journals simultaneously post to a parent company's COA and create journals available to post to within the COAs for one or more subsidiary companies. 23.700 . The application creates a number to identify the detail. click Yes. A detail cannot post a zero amount. you must reopen the period. To allocate amounts to this period. Use the Description field to identify the detail. In the G/L Account field. 16. select the subsidiary (child) company. Enter an account in the External G/L Account field or click External G/L Account to find and select one. right-click in the field and select Spelling from the context menu. If the transaction Apply Date falls in a different fiscal year and period in the target book than in the source book. 21. right-click the field and select Calculator. If required. The journal description supplies the default values. 20. fix these errors and re-post the group. Each detail has either a debit or credit. Click Save. If you need. Tip If posting errors occur. The journal group determines the COA to which its journals post. You do this within Fiscal Calendar Maintenance. To check the spelling of the description. Select the Multi-Company check box. enter an account or click the G/L Account button to define one. 92 Epicor ERP | 10. 17. Now you can define the multi-company details to update a COA in a subsidiary (child) company. This mode reduces tax consequences in Russia and other jurisdictions that tax based on turnover in general ledger accounts. If you attempt this. From the New menu. 14. an error message appears. In the External Company drop-down list. 22. From the Actions menu. Important You cannot allocate amounts to a closed fiscal year and period. The journal entries post. The G/L Account field defines the parent account. The External G/L Account defines the target account.0. To calculate an amount. Company options may require you enter balanced journals. select New Journal Line. select Post. click AutoBalance to create a balancing detail based on an entered credit or debit amount. the default date falls in the period following which the original journal posts. The Master COA of the subsidiary defines the targeted COA. 15. Using the autobalance feature ensures you create balancing entries for a journal. Other multi-company fields now activate to help you define the detail. a message appears that explains you should review these errors on the Posting Log. Multi-company functionality distributes allocations from an account in a parent COA to an account in a subsidiary COA. the transaction uses the fiscal year and period values in the target book. Use either the Debit field or the Credit field to enter the amount posted to the selected account. 4. Each journal contains the same distributions defined on the AP invoice. Launch General Ledger Account Maintenance in the other companies that will receive AP allocations. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 2. Verify that the Multi-Company Direct Server process is set up and running before you begin setting up multi-company AP allocations. Navigate to the Multi-Company>Detail sheet. Also make sure you have configured the External Company GL control type and its GL controls to handle multi-company journal functionality. 1. This external company can now receive AP allocations from the parent company.700 93 . At the corporate (parent) location. 3. you must define some options within the setup programs described on this topic. The journal entries also display the source company. Navigate to other companies and create external company records which allow accounts payable allocations. the Purchase Journal contains an inter-company account. Launch External Company Maintenance within a company you wish to use AP allocations. Launch General Ledger Account Maintenance in one of the companies. The AP invoice is entered at the corporate (parent) company and the allocations are defined for each invoice line. 7. Epicor ERP | 10. and invoice number information. you distribute AP allocations on specific AP invoice miscellaneous lines.Setup To set up the Multi-Company AP Allocations process. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account 8. 6. Select the Chart of Accounts (COA) which is shared across all companies. After the invoice posts. From the External System drop-down list. Select the Multi-Company check box on each account. Tip This functionality is similar to Multi-Company Journals. you can set up your Epicor application to distribute Accounts Payable allocations from these journals. 10. The GL control attached to these transactions needs to use the External Company GL control type in order to define the required intercompany account context. Within AP Invoice Entry. Select the Allow AP Allocations to check box. You use that functionality to distribute GL journal amounts to GL journals in one or more subsidiary (child) companies.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Company AP Allocations If your organization uses multi-company journals. select Multi-Company Direct. selecting the Allow AP Allocations check box on each record. Multi-Company AP Allocations . 9. 11. 5. Select the same COA and indicate the same accounts are multi-company accounts. Click the GL Account button to find and select the accounts you want to define as multi-company accounts. Create an external company record for a company you want to interact with the current company record. supplier.0. Continue to create other external companies for the current company as you need. any subsidiary (child) companies set up to receive AP allocations then receive this data within their inter-company general ledger journals. Click on the Actions menu and select Post. Click OK. post this journal entry. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Journal Entry 15. Multi-Company AP Allocations . click the Allocation button.Setup topic.Process This topic describes how you use multi-company AP allocations within your organization. Select the account you need within the GL Account field on the GL Distribution grid. Menu Path: Financial Management > Accounts Payable > General Operations > Invoice Entry 2. The journal header is updated with the supplier. press Tab to create a new GL distribution line. If you need. 16. 10. If this entry is correct. Before you can use this functionality. Create an AP invoice. 1. Notice the AP allocations have updated this account. 3. enter the amount you will apply to this account. Select the Multi-Company check box. 6. Use this sheet to distribute the current line amounts to specific General Ledger accounts. select an Allocation and enter an Amount. 4. you must set up the records described in the Multi-Company AP Allocations . The Allocation window appears. 94 Epicor ERP | 10. Find and select the Inter-company GL account. 13. 5. 14. 11. You can also click the Down Arrow next to the New button on the Standard toolbar and select the New GL Line command.700 . Launch AP Invoice Entry within the parent location. Launch Journal Entry. 7. 12. If you need to divide invoice line amounts between multiple GL accounts. 9. 17. This multi-company AP allocation amount is now recorded in the GL transactions for the target company.0. AP invoice. and legal number from the original AP invoice. Analyze this journal entry to verify it is correct. This expense account contains the value allocated to it. Navigate to the Lines > GL Analysis sheet. Select the External Company that will receive the allocations. In the Amount field. navigate to the subsidiary (child) company which received them. 8. After the Multi-Company Direct Server Process distributes the allocations.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Your organization is now set up to distribute multi-company AP allocations. the consolidation process is run internally within the company. You can even consolidate multiple child books into multiple parent books in different companies. Tip A number of programs are involved in the consolidation process. when you need to report financial results in different currencies. Consolidations can be a one-to-one relationship between a source book in one company to a main target book in another company. Through the consolidation process. review the System Personalization .Favorites Bar topics. When the consolidation is complete. so this data can now move from the intermediate book into the target book within the target company. The COA account structure matches the structure in the target book. or consolidation. for example. the multi-company processes are not needed to move data during this process. In this situation. you then later transfer the approved results to the parent company. If you preview the results in an intermediate book. Process Flow The financial data from the source book is transformed into the account structures defined in an intermediate. The consolidation process can be setup to handle any multi-company structure you need. these results reflect the posting process defined for the books involved during the consolidation.0. The following diagram illustrates the consolidation process flow: Epicor ERP | 10. For more information.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Company Consolidation The Multi-Company Consolidation process rolls up financial balances between source and target books. you should add the consolidation programs as icons to a group on your Favorites Tab.700 95 . You might do this. You can then quickly launch these programs instead of repeatedly navigating the Main Menu. Consolidations can also be set up between source and target books within the same company. You can also report these results using a different fiscal calendar selected on the receiving target book. You run this process at the end of each fiscal period and then total the consolidation results at the end of each fiscal year. you can re-calculate transactions posted in one currency to another currency. book. typically books from a child company to a parent company or an external application. You can also set up a consolidation routine that consolidates transactions from multiple child books into one target parent book. To save time setting up and running this process. you can either preview the results in an intermediate (consolidation) book in the source company or review the final results in the parent company. The consolidation process begins transforming these GL transactions into the format needed for the intermediate (consolidation) book. The general ledger (GL) transactions post to the source book. These transactions use the posting process defined for the source book. Epicor ERP | 10. The GL transactions are then transformed into the account structure required for the intermediate book. the process first converts the amounts using the exchange rate calculated by the selected consolidated rate type and the consolidated type.0. Consolidation rate types convert balances when the books use different currencies.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide The consolidation sequence: 96 1.700 . 3. 4. 2. consolidation types determine the method used to calculate the converted account balances. These GL transactions post to the intermediate book. If the intermediate book uses a different currency. Reports can now be run on the consolidated financial data. If you need. Launch External Company Maintenance from your source company. Before you can do this step. You need to enter at least two external company records. Epicor ERP | 10. the GL transactions move from the intermediate book in the source company to the target book within the target company. one record for each company. you must set up the books. Now using the Multi-Company Direct Server Process. review the New Company Setup section for information. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 1. charts of accounts. and the target company needs an external company record for the source company. Setup Process Steps Before you can run the Multi-Company Consolidation process.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 5.0. you must create the source and target companies within your database. The source company needs an external company record for the target company. You create these records within External Company Maintenance. but they will be reviewed here as well to explain how they impact the consolidation process. and dashboards within the target company. Some of these set up process steps were described in the New Company Setup section. financial trackers. The following diagram illustrates the relationship between the records involved in the consolidation process: Important Be sure you set up your consolidation process in the sequence described in this section. This data can also display on various entry programs. 6. and consolidation records you need to define the financial relationship between the source and target books. Source and Target External Companies Each source and target company needs to have an external company record for the other company. Each record you create is often needed by the following record documented in this sequence. Important The process steps in the Multi-Company Consolidation section are optional for the Financial Implementation course.700 97 . The GL transactions post to the target book. 98 Epicor ERP | 10. The consolidation process is then run internally within the company. Enter the External Company ID and Description you need. Before you create a new book. This indicates that this external company can receive General Ledger allocations from your current company. 5. 12. 10. 11. Tip You can also create source and target books within the same company. 7. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. and currency the book will use. this indicates that this external company can transfer general ledger account information to your new company. 8. You need to create an equivalent external company record for the source company within the target company. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar.700 . Select the Allow AP Allocations to check box. chart of accounts.0. Define how the external company handles financial information it sends and receives from your current company. This prefix is automatically placed on any journal groups that process intercompany transactions.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 2. Select the Allow GJ Allocations to check box. The external company record for the target company is created in the source company. 13. Launch External Company Configuration. You use allocations to automatically distribute expense amounts across several accounts. 6. In the External Company ID field. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. the Multi-Company Direct Server Process is not needed to move data during this part of the process. you select AP allocations on specific AP invoice lines. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Book 1. Click Save and exit External Company Maintenance. From the External System drop-down list. select the required ID (or the ID you just created). Navigate to Book Maintenance within the source company. 14. Enter the Journal Group Prefix you want for this external company. Select the Send GL Accounts check box. you must set up the chart of accounts. Source and Target Books You next must create the source book within the source company and the target book within the target company. select Multi-Company Direct. fiscal calendar. You need to define the fiscal calendar. and currency each book will use. This indicates this external company can receive Accounts Payable allocations from your current company. Navigate to the Multi-Company sheet. From the External System drop-down list. Repeat these steps within the target company. 4. 9. 3. select Multi-Company Direct. Tip You must select a Retained Earnings account. 3. 9. This option indicates the book records the source financial activity of the current company. 5. Before you can create currency rate types. To learn how to link a global currency rate type. If you do not and you save the book. an error displays. Tip In order to remove duplicate account entries which can generate because of inter-company consolidations. The source book is now ready to use.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 2. Currency rate types define the rules used to convert source and target currency pairs. they can also share a global rate type available within the database. Note. however. 7. Use the Chart of Account drop-down list to define the Chart of Account (COA) you wish to use with the source book.0. Consolidation rate types are used when a source book has a different currency from an intermediate (consolidation) book. Currency Rate Type Currency rate types define the rules for converting all transaction and reporting currencies within a company. Click on the Retained Earnings sheet to define the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. Click on the Validations sheet to define how errors are handled when journals are posted to the book. Books can also store journals using transaction currencies as needed for multi-currency reporting. select the Standard option.700 99 . you must enter the currencies your consolidating companies use within Currency Master Maintenance. Use the Book Currency drop-down list to define the currency of the book. consider creating an elimination book as well. Select the fiscal Calendar you wish to use with this book. They determine how the exchange rate is calculated to transform amounts from a source currency to the target currency. 10. 4. This value displays on various drop-down lists throughout the application. 11. Epicor ERP | 10. field to determine the primary function of the book. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Tip Do not confuse currency rate types with consolidation rate types and consolidation types. Use this book to remove any duplicate entries which may generate during the consolidation process. Optionally. You can divide the reported retained earnings balance by substituting a segment in the retained earnings account for a corresponding segment in the in the income statement. Enter the concise Description for the book. Enter the Book identifier you want. that manual entry is required within an elimination book. 6. These instructions describe how to create a new currency rate type. review the Link Global Records topic within the previous New Company Setup section. These calendars define the fiscal periods used by the application to record transactions. This value displays within various reports and programs. The two companies can each have unique currency rate types. When you finish. The book currency can be used on financial reports and in consolidations. 8. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. From the Type drop-down list. The source and target companies need to each have an active currency rate type. All journal amounts post in the currency selected on the book. Navigate to the target company and repeat these steps to create the target book. Select the Global check box to indicate that this currency rate type can be used by other companies within your organization. 14.0. use the Code button (in the Base Rate Type section) to select a currency rate type you wish to use as a parent record for the current rate type. 6. If you can round values calculated for the Alternative Cross Rate Currency. The Alternative Cross Rate currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency for the Alternate Cross-Rate conversion rule or the Secondary Interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules.700 . 11. 9.Divides an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency. Use the Conversion Rule drop-down list to define the rule used for the conversion. • Inverse -.Multiplies an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency. 10. 4.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Consolidation types determine how these balances are calculated between the source book and the intermediate book. All of the available currency pairs can be displayed on this sheet. The Source Currency fields display the original currency for the conversion rule. The Target Currency fields display the resulting currency for the conversion rule. or Interim. 5. Optionally. select the Round check box. Available conversion rules: • Direct . The Cross-Rate currency defined on the Detail sheet is the Interim currency. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies. Use the Tree View to navigate between the available rules. select the Round check box. any updates you enter are not sent to these companies. 15. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. Use the Code and Description fields to define the main values used for this currency rate type. If the Global Lock check box is clear. any updates made to this currency rate type are also automatically sent to all companies that use this rate type. 3. You can enter between 0-6 decimal places in this field. 100 Epicor ERP | 10. however. 8. 13. 12. If you can round values calculated for the Cross Rate Currency. The Cross Rate Currency section contains the fields you use to define the interim currency for the Cross-Rate conversion rule or the primary interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules. Be sure to enter unique values that help users quickly identify the rate type on various reports and programs. • Cross-Rate -. Use this field when you just need to change a few conversion rules from an existing rate type. 2.Uses an intermediate. When you finish defining the primary values for the currency rate type. Menu Path: Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Rate Type 1. If you select this check box. click on the Conversion Rules tab. Click New on the Standard toolbar. The conversion rule changes amounts in the Source Currency to the Target Currency. 7. Use the Decimals field to define how many decimals calculate and display for amounts converted through this rate type. 3. They define both the method for consolidating the amounts and the currency rate type used to convert the currency amounts. Select the Default Method used to calculate the exchange rate applied during consolidations.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount. If this check box is selected. or float. Consolidation Rate Type Consolidation rate types convert balances when a source book and an intermediate book use different currencies. The Display Mode indicates how the conversion rules display within programs that show the source and target currency amounts. the application considers that the conversion rule uses a variable. exchange rate and it can be updated daily. The currency pair displays along with an arrow indicating the direction of the conversion and the exchange rate below it. 19. 18. 20. and the Effective Rate cannot be updated by this conversion rules. The Alternate Cross-Rate currency defined on the Detail sheet is the alternate Interim currency. 16. you must create a currency rate type. click Save on the Standard toolbar. • Reverse Double Cross-Rate -. Epicor ERP | 10. Use the Consolidation Rate Type field and the Description field to identify the new type. The grid on this sheet displays all the currency pairs and contains a drop-down list where you select the conversion rule you need. You can now either repeat these steps to create a currency rate for the other company involved in the consolidation. This conversion rule runs the Direct calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency. If you select this check box. Navigate to Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance within the source company. This conversion rule runs the Inverse calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency.Uses an alternate Interim currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies. If the check box is clear. this prepares the amounts to be transferred to the target book. click on the Matrix sheet. Select the Use Base Rate check box if the conversion rules from the parent rate type (if one is selected) should be used for the currency pair. To define all the conversion rules for this rate type at the same time. The exchange rates used throughout the period are totaled and divided by the number of exchange rates to determine the average exchange rate for the period.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount. Click New on the Standard toolbar.0. • Double Cross-Rate -. however. If you created a global currency rate type. 4. 2. • Period End uses the exchange rate from the last day of the consolidated period.700 101 . you could instead link this global record in the other company. 17. This ensures both companies use the same conversion rules. however. Before you can set up a consolidation rate type. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Rate Type 1.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes • Alternate Cross-Rate -. all other fields on this sheet become unavailable. or fixed. Use the Fixed Rate to indicate whether the rate defined for this currency pair can update the Effective Rate value. Available options: • Daily Average applies an average exchange rate for a consolidated period. the rate is locked. When you finish. In the Consolidation Rate Type field. Available options: • Balance uses year-to-date amounts to determine account balances. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Use the Type field and the Description field to identify the consolidation type. This program is described within the Consolidation Processing section. You next need to create the intermediate (consolidation) book. 5. Tip Although you only need to create one consolidation type. You next must create a consolidation type. 102 Epicor ERP | 10. 6. As a result. 4. Consolidation Type Consolidation types determine the method used to calculate account balances during consolidations and the consolidation rate type applied to these balances. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. 3.0.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • None uses the exchange rate currently entered in the Consolidate to Parent Entry program. you typically create two types. • Period Movements uses period amounts to determine account balances. This type of calculation typically applies to monetary balance-sheet accounts. 5. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Type 1. Select the Currency Rate Type you use with the consolidation rate type.700 . prior-period adjustments affect account balances to which this type applies. Click New on the Standard toolbar. select the method used to calculate account balances during consolidations. One consolidation type handles income statement accounts and the other consolidation type handles balance sheet accounts. 2. this type of calculation typically applies to non-monetary balance-sheet accounts and income-statements accounts. Navigate to Consolidation Type Maintenance within the source company. The selected default method interacts with the conversion rules defined on the currency rate type to calculate the currency amounts which display in the intermediate book. For example. select the consolidation rate type you will use to define the method through which exchange rates are calculated against currency amounts to generate account balances in the intermediate book. In the Calculation Type field. 6. You can create as many consolidation types as you need. you could create a separate consolidation type for each currency rate type you need for income accounts. Before you can create consolidation types. you must create a consolidation rate type. You now have both the consolidation rate type and the consolidation type you need to run the consolidation between the source and intermediate books within the same company. The Currency ID defines how the currency displays on various reports and programs within the company. Enter the concise Description for the book. and the exchange rate is calculated as a zero value. This value displays on various drop-down lists throughout the application. Click the Type drop-down list and select the Consolidation option. 9. Because these currency code values are different. These calendars define the fiscal periods used by the application to record transactions. A typical error can occur when you set up a new child company. This value displays within various reports and programs. the Epicor application will treat these records as separate currencies. Before you create a new intermediate book. Click on the Retained Earnings sheet to define the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. this selected currency must be the same as the target book's currency. Enter the Book identifier you want. 2. 4. This chart of accounts must be the same as the COA on the target book. so this record indicates US dollars in the new company. Each record has both a Currency Code and a Currency ID value. 8. Selecting the Consolidation type prevents financial transactions within the intermediate book from posting.700 103 . Navigate to Book Maintenance within the source company. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Book 1. the Currency Code defines the entire currency record for uses like consolidation and other system processes. You can divide the reported retained earnings balance by substituting a segment in the retained earnings account for a corresponding segment in the in the income statement. This indicates that the book merges balances from a source book (or source books) to consolidate the financial results with a target book within a different company. Tip Be sure to verify the currency codes match on the currency master records used by both companies. Use the Book Currency drop-down list to define the currency of the intermediate book. 7.0. Click the New button on the Standard toolbar. These transactions instead must transfer to the target book in the parent company. 5. For example. 6. Epicor ERP | 10. you must set up the chart of accounts. the parent company can then post these transactions. Select the fiscal Calendar you wish to use with this book. The fiscal calendar on the intermediate book can be different from the fiscal calendar selected on the target book. You then create a currency record in the parent company to consolidate with this child company. and you enter a currency code and a currency ID with "USA" values. 3. You use this intermediate book to both preview the consolidation results from the source book and transform the data into an account structure that matches the target book.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Intermediate Book Your source book needs to first consolidate with an intermediate book before its results can populate the target book. and currency the intermediate book will use. The first currency you create is by default assigned the "Base" currency code and then you enter a "USA" currency ID. fiscal calendar. In order to consolidate the amounts within the target company. Use the Chart of Account drop-down list to define the chart of accounts (COA) you wish to use with the intermediate book. you create a child company which uses US dollars. you must define the consolidation rate types. 3. the target book. 2.700 . the consolidation type. 7. the consolidation mode. 11. Each consolidation definition defines a target book. continuous consolidations occur whenever the multi-company process refreshes data between the two books. you consolidate journals at the same time. select whether you want the consolidation to be Periodic or Continuous. Click New on the Standard toolbar. and the target book. and the Description text displays in other programs. the intermediate book. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Definition 1. 5. In the Consolidation Type drop-down list. or it can be a target book you use in an external application. Consolidations can occur continuously or periodically. You define all of these options within Consolidation Definition Maintenance. and one or more source books from which the financial data originates. posting to both the intermediate book and the target book. To consolidate books between multiple companies within the Epicor application: • In the Company field. Consolidation Definition Consolidation definitions determine the settings that control the consolidation between source and target books. • In the Book field. Use the Consolidation ID and Description fields to identify the consolidation definition. 10. Navigate to Consolidation Definition Maintenance within the source company. If you are running a periodic consolidation through this definition. These settings include currency conversion defaults. click Save on the Standard toolbar. When you select this check box. one intermediate book. This value limits the books you can select. Application processes use the value in the Consolidation ID field. Before you can create a consolidation definition. If you do not and you save the book. 6. 4. Periodic consolidations occur at the end of each fiscal period. use the Book drop-down list to select the intermediate book you created to both prepare and preview the results of the consolidation. Click on the Validations sheet to define how errors are handled when journals are posted to the book. at least one source book. When you finish. The target book can be available within another company. select the target company that owns the target book. 104 Epicor ERP | 10.0.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Tip You must select a Retained Earnings account. you can only choose books owned by the target company. select the target book to which the consolidated journals post. you need to select an intermediate book. Within the Intermediate Book Options group box. and the chart of accounts the intermediate and target books share. You can consolidate books between companies within the Epicor application or with an external system. Consolidation definitions control the transfer of accounts from one or more source books to one intermediate book and then ultimately to a target book. an error will display. Select the Immediate Transaction check box to launch the consolidation as a single process. enter the path and name of the file to which the consolidation journals post. Optionally. 11. 13. 17. select the target COA to which the consolidation journals post. Use the Intermediate Journal and Target Journal fields to respectively select the journal codes used to group consolidation journals posted to an intermediate and target book. enter a different exchange account in the source book. Intermediate journals apply only to consolidations that run in periodic mode. select the book used as the source. The consolidation process creates journals that reflect these changes and posts them to the account. 8. • In the Currency field. Typically. losses and gains result from changes in the currency exchange rates. 14. In the Diff Exchange Account field.700 105 . used to transfer journals to a remote parent. The consolidation process creates a flat file in ASCII format. Values in this field are limited to the standard books used by the source company. If necessary. select Reverse Debit/Credit to reverse debit and credit entries on journals created from the source book. • If available. Import Consolidation from Subsidiary creates consolidation journals in the remote parent. In some cases. 9. 10. that if the target and source books have the same COA. • In the Output File field. • In the Target COA field. If you enter a zero (0) value. this value is the same as the COA used for the target book on the remote database. click Save on the Standard toolbar. select the currency used by the journals posted to the output file. In the Closing Period field. Tip To create a ConsolidationLog file. you can leave this field blank. In the Source Book field. you prevent consolidation journals from generating within the source book. used to post the journals to the book in the other database. Note however. This option limits the consolidation to closed periods. 15. • Select Epicor ERP Database if the consolidation targets another application database. 12. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New Source Book Definition. create a txt file named ConsolLog. The consolidation process generates an output file. Repeat steps 8-16 to add more source books to the consolidation definition. 18. use the Diff Exchange Account field to enter the different exchange account used when the consolidation process targets an output file.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes To consolidate books from the source company to an external system. You next must define the source book or books involved in the consolidation. use the settings in the Remote Options area to define a book in a remote database as the consolidation target. 16.txt and add it to the \\yourservername\epicor\epicor905\Custom directory. These settings determine how consolidation journals post to an output file used for the transfer: • Select the Remote Parent check box. select the Exclude Open Periods check box to prevent open periods from being used in consolidations for the source book. Use the COA Map ID field to select a map that links accounts in the source book to an intermediate or target book. You can add as many source books as you need. The consolidation uses the account to post journals that reflect losses and gains from changes in the currency exchange rates. When you finish. enter the maximum number of closed periods included in consolidations that use the source book. Use the Balance Sheet and Income Statement fields to respectively select the default consolidation rate type applied to the source book's balance-sheet and income-statement accounts. This option effectively reverses source book entries in the target book. Epicor ERP | 10.0. Be sure to select a map which reflects the chart of accounts structure you need in the target book. 9. 106 Epicor ERP | 10. launch Consolidate to Parent Entry and post the results. Run the Consolidated Year End Process after you use Consolidate to Parent Entry to post journals for the last fiscal period in a source book. periodic consolidations just have one. 3. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Consolidate to Parent 1. field to enter a different exchange account used when the consolidation process targets an output file. change the value in the Source Book field. The application creates a value in the Consolidation ID field.Detail sheet. This process insures that source and target books contain the same opening balances. The consolidation process creates journals for source COA segments that maintain balances. This program specifies the consolidation period and the consolidation definition used to run the process. The consolidation uses this book as the source for consolidation journals. In this situation. ID button to find and select the consolidation definition you need. Optionally. If you need. 5. 7. you need to run the Consolidated Year End Process. This concise explanation describes the purpose of the consolidation to other users. Click the Cons Def. Now navigate to the Source Control . You use consolidation journals to validate entries and adjust journals. you can run the consolidation process. Consolidate to Parent Launch Consolidate to Parent Entry when you are ready to consolidate the financial results from a source book to a target book. 6. Acct. you run the Import Consolidation From Subsidiary program. change the value in the Output File Name field.700 . Before you can use Consolidate to Parent Entry. When you reach the end of the fiscal year. If necessary. To do this. Use this field when the consolidation creates consolidation journals for a book in a different database. 8.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide You have finished setting up the consolidation between the source company and the target company. You primarily run this process from the Consolidate to Parent Entry program. use the Exchange Rate Diff. The selected consolidation definition defines the default value which displays in this field. Consolidation Processing Now that you have set up the consolidation between the source book (or books) and target book. If you need. Each time you need to consolidate financial data between the source and target books (typically at the end of a fiscal period). Identify the consolidation in the Description field. Navigate to Consolidate to Parent Entry within the source company. you must create a consolidation definition. Continuous consolidations can have multiple source books. This program posts consolidation balances for a fiscal year and creates opening consolidation balances for the next fiscal year. You can now begin running the consolidation process. you can also pull in consolidation journals from a company in a different Epicor database. you pull in an import file from the company in the external database which can consolidate with a target book in the parent company. Click New on the Standard toolbar. 2. 4.0. 19. change the value in the Exchange Rate Diff Account field. If necessary. If you select this check box. Optionally.00 when the source and target books use the same currency. 20.700 107 . Click on the Actions menu. 24. This field determines the maximum number of closed periods included in consolidation. Select Get Default Rates to make currency rates available during the consolidation. Set the rate to 1. When you finish. You can then consolidate other periods in the consolidation record before you post this period. You cannot enter 0. Epicor ERP | 10. select the Bypassed check box to post subsequent periods before processing the selected period. 22. You are now ready to consolidate the financial results to the target book. 17. you prevent consolidation journals from generating within the source book. In the Fiscal Period field.0. However. 18. click on the Actions menu and select Transfer Intermediate.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 10. The Consolidation Post Process program opens. Click on the Actions menu. you limit the consolidation to closed periods. 16. If you need. If you enter a zero (0) value. 12. 15. Select Post to post review journals from the source book. If this definition is selected for immediate transaction. enter the fiscal year that contains the period to be consolidated. change the value in the Closing Period field. you have an additional step. 11. if this consolidation definition does not automatically transfer data to the target book (the Immediate Transaction check box is clear on the definition). In the Fiscal Year/Suffix field. 23. you can now review the financial results in the intermediate book. This field specifies a different exchange account in the source book. click Save on the Standard toolbar. You run this process regardless of whether you consolidate books with the same or different currencies. Navigate to the Source Control > Source Rates > Detail sheet to display the currency rate types used during the consolidation process. change the Exclude Open Periods option to either include or exclude open periods in this consolidation. When you are ready to transfer the intermediate book results to the target book. If necessary. enter the period to be consolidated. 13. run the Consolidated Year End Process. To complete the consolidation at the end of a fiscal year. If you need. If you will review the transactions in the intermediate book. 21. use the Exchange Rate field to change the exchange rate used to convert between the currency of the source book and the currency of the target book. The financial data from the source book (or books) is consolidated into the target book. the data transfers directly to the target book. Click Submit to run the process. 14. You can indicate that the consolidation occurs in a different fiscal year and period. The application uses this identifier in batch processing of imported journals. select the book to which the imported journals post. In the Book ID field. Enter the path and name of the import file in the Import File Name field. 1. 9.0. 4. This process posts the consolidation balances for a fiscal year and then creates opening consolidation balances for the next fiscal year. 10. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Consolidated Year End 1. You run this program when your organization is set up with a multi-site. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Import Consolidation From Subsidiary Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. The description identifies the record to users of this program. Posting errors might occur if journals apply to a closed period. Only run this process after you have posted the last fiscal period in Consolidate to Parent Entry. Optionally. 7. This description supplies information to the user who next runs the import. Use the Journal Header Description field to describe a new import or change the description of an existing one. enter a journal group ID. specify or change the journal code in the Journal field. 5. 108 Epicor ERP | 10. environment. you need to import an external file which contains the consolidation data. Use the Fiscal Year field and Period field to determine the period to which the imported journals post. The application creates an identifier for the consolidation in the Import ID field. instead of a multi-company. Use the Description field to identify the import record. Journal codes applied during posting can be used to group journals on reports and trackers. If you need. In the Fiscal Year field. 2. Select a target book that uses the same COA. Consolidated Year End Process To complete the consolidation for a fiscal year.700 . 6. Consolidation definitions specify a target COA used to create journals when the consolidation process creates an output file. The selected group ID determines the default. 2. 3. Unlike a consolidation which occurs between multiple companies within the same database. Use the Source Book ID field to select a book from which consolidation journals originate.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Import Consolidation From Subsidiary Use this optional program if you need to import journals from a source book which exists in a different Epicor database. Click New on the Standard toolbar. enter the year to be closed. The fiscal calendar for the selected book determines available fiscal years and periods. you must run the Consolidated Year End Process. 8. Click Import to run the process. 11. change the date in the Apply Date field. In the Group ID field. When the data is updated in the source company. Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > General Operations > Automatic Transaction Reversal 1. If you have already consolidated to the target book. this is known as ordinary storno. a second entry is created as a $1000. The program provides two ways to cancel journals: • Reverse . a posted journal line debits an asset account.00 credit to the payroll accrual. you can first reverse the consolidation in the target book. If the journal posted to multiple books. You can then reverse the consolidation within the intermediate book before you transfer the data to the target book. You cannot choose the details you reverse. • Red storno . Click Submit to run the process.00 debit to the same account. Reversals apply to all details in this journal and to the entire amount on a journal line.0. Journals posted to multiple books must be reversed one at a time. The consolidation will then not enter double values in the target book. however. You typically use this program in two situations. In Russia. For example. run the Consolidate to Parent program to re-post. When reversed. the consolidation can be run again. Automatic Transaction Reversal The Automatic Transaction Reversal program cancels posted journals.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 3. Troubleshooting The Multi-Company Consolidation functionality contains several tools you can use to find and correct problems which occured during consolidations.Transactions contain reversing amounts. You can reverse a journal posted to one book without reversing the same journal posted to other books. Use this program to reverse the last posted consolidation so that you can correct an issue in the source data and then re-post the consolidation. For example.700 109 . nor can you partially reverse a detail. 2. The journal displays its header and line information in the program. use the GL Transactions List to select one of the books to which the journal posted. and credit amounts equal to debit amounts on the original journal. This type of journal contains a negative debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original journal increased the account balance. you can make the corrections and then re-post. you estimate payroll as a $1000. When you preview a consolidation in an intermediate book. This mode reduces tax consequences in Russia and other jurisdictions that tax based on turnover in general ledger accounts. The year-end financials from the source book are consolidated with the target book. and then reverse the consolidation again in the intermediate book (a user within the source company launches this reversal process). the journal contains a positive debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original entry decreased the account balance. You reverse a single GL journal at a time. Click the Source Journal Number button and use the fields in the Search program to find and select a journal you want to reverse. Epicor ERP | 10. the most recent journal which was posted. After you make the changes you need. you may discover an error. A red storno journal posts a negative debit line to the same account to cancel the increase from the original detail. When you cancel posted journals.Transactions post debit amounts equal to credit amounts on the original journal. 0. • Scheduled Tasks . however. This type of journal contains a negative debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original journal increased the account balance. All report programs (running on the appserver) generate physical files. The description displays in this program. Display the Transaction Details sheet.Displays the reports. Available sheets: • Active Tasks . processes. 4. this is known as ordinary storno. From the Actions menu. the journal contains a positive debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original entry decreased the account balance. The System Monitor displays all of the processes run from your client workstation during the current Epicor application session. and Chart Tracker. the program creates a transaction that posts debit amounts equal to the credit amounts on the original journal and credit amounts equal to the debit amounts on the original journal. processes. or other tasks scheduled to run in the future. This program contains sheets which you use to check on the past. the TaskAgent does not purge it until the system clock passes this defined Archive Period value. use this program verify the process executed correctly. 110 Epicor ERP | 10. After you run the consolidation process. • If you select Reverse As Red Storno. In Russia. the program creates a journal with reversing amounts. 5. use the Archive Period field on the report/form program. When you enter a value in this field. System Monitor You use the System Monitor to verify the consolidation process ran correctly.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 3. You can display this program by clicking its icon on the system tray on the Windows toolbar.Displays any reports. executive queries. These files are the data source that the System Monitor (running on the client) uses to perform the actual printing. the GL Report. Select each line on the List grid and use Reversing Line Description field to describe the reason for the reversal. Records automatically purge from this sheet when they are 30 or more days old. The TaskAgent (also running on the application server) runs a purge of the reports approximately every 15 minutes.Displays all reports/forms programs you have run. Use Reverse Transaction and Reverse As Red Storno to determine how the journal is cancelled. launch this program from within the application. present. Menu Path: System Setup > System Maintenance > System Monitor Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 6. Tip The System Monitor automatically activates when you start the Epicor application. executive queries. • If you select Reverse Transaction. processes. To keep a specific report file available for a longer length of time. or other items currently running. or other tasks run in the past. select Reverse. executive queries.Displays the reports. • Reports . and future status of tasks. The selected journals are reversed. • History Tasks .700 . You can also. Epicor ERP | 10. you can access this log and search for error messages. You can then click this icon on your desktop to display the current log. Tip To make it easier to display this log. You set up this log within the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (or Multi-Company Server Process. 2. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > Setup > Business Activity Query Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. If an issue occurs during consolidation. Click the New button. this log automatically populates with process entries. identical view across companies within your organization. 4. Use this workbench when an incoming record is not complete or contains some other error. This process runs continuously in your multi-site environment. Navigate to the General tab. Create a Global BAQ When you create a new query.0. 3. 1. Multi-Company Log You can also review the progress of a consolidation using the Multi-Company Log. you can reconcile the discrepancy within the Integrated Table Workbench. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > Integrated Table Workbench Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. passing data across companies and sites as needed. You can then discover the specific cause of the problem and correct it. Users can then review data through a consistent. Launch the Business Activity Query Designer. Select the Global check box. While the Multi-Company Direct Server Process runs. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process Global Dashboards and Reports You can create dashboards and Business Activity Query (BAQ) reports that display data through a global BAQ. if applicable). you indicate it is a global BAQ. You activate this log by defining a directory path and a file name for it.700 111 . Rather than update the record in the other system and re-run a process. create a shortcut icon for it.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Integrated Table Workbench The Integrated Table Workbench is an important time-saving tool you can use to resolve problems with consolidation journals. Review the Multi-Company Dashboards section for more information. Now click the Refresh button on the Standard toolbar. 8. 6. you create a Multi-Company Dashboard. You can now use the global BAQ on dashboards and BAQ reports. 1. Now set up the business activity query so that it pulls in the data you wish to display. Menu Path: System Management > Business Activity Queries > BAQ Report Designer 112 Epicor ERP | 10. Build a Global Dashboard You create global dashboards within the Dashboard program. From the New menu. The Dashboard Query Properties window displays.0. select New Dashboard. Tip This dashboard will only display data from the current company. Click OK. click Save on the Standard toolbar. 6. from the Tools menu. review the Business Activity Query Designer topics. If necessary. 3. If you want to display data from multiple companies at the same time. select New Query. When you finish. From the New menu. This topic contains an overview of how you create an BAQ report. Build a Global Report You create reports that use global BAQs through the BAQ Report Designer. Launch the Dashboard program. Tip For information on how to create a BAQ. Navigate to the BAQ Report Designer. enter a brief explanation of the dashboard. In the Description field. 1.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 5. This ensures you are working in the Developer mode. This global BAQ is added to an internal multi-company table. 5.700 . 9. 4. 7. 2. select Developer. Click on the Query ID button to find and select the global business activity query (BAQ) you wish to use. In the Definition ID field. The query is then automatically copied to the companies within your organization set up for multi-company. enter a name for the dashboard. Data now displays within this dashboard. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > Dashboard Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Multi-Company Dashboards This section explains how you create a dashboard that can display data from multiple external companies. From the External System drop down list. For example. 4. and Sorts. you can also enter it directly in the BAQ ID field. This value displays in searches. EPIC03. 3. Enter a Report ID. In the External Company ID field. button to find and select the global query. Enter the text you want to display. 5. The text you enter in the Form Title field displays as the title of the report. it cannot have any spaces. Continue to add the Options Fields. 7. You can connect to the application server directly or indirectly. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 2. Filters. 9. you first create an external company record for each company from which you want to pull data. If you connect to the server indirectly (Multi-Company).Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 1. Enter a Description for the report. When you are ready to design the report layout. review the BAQ Report Designer topics in the application help or the BAQ Report Designer chapter in the Epicor ICE Tools User Guide. Epicor ERP | 10. Now click on the New button on the Standard toolbar. enter the identifier for the external company you will create. 3. 2. If you know the name of the BAQ.. Create the External Company To create a multi-company dashboard. Click Save. Now click the BAQ ID. enter the server name in the Server URL field. 8. 6.0. Tip If you need more details on building BAQ reports. The method you use determines what value you enter in the Server URL field: a.. 4. select either Multi-Company Direct or Multi-Company. Launch External Company Maintenance. These items determine the user input parameters that display on the report window. click Actions > Design SSRS Report.700 113 . Click the New button. 5. This value identifies the report in the database. 9. 2. The user can now display data from the selected external companies. you must enter the complete address within the Server URL field. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. To finish. Menu Path: System Setup > Security Maintenance > User Account Security Maintenance Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. button to find and select the external company that this user needs. 10.700 . You do this within the User Account Security Maintenance. b. This value is the uniform resource locator address for the Epicor application's application server. You are now ready to create the multi-company dashboard. 3. In the tree view. If you connect to the application server directly (Multi-Company Direct). 7. 4. select the company from which the user will pull data. Save and exit External Company Maintenance. Launch User Account Security Maintenance.0. review the System Agent Maintenance topics in the application help. Click on the Down Arrow next to the New button and select External Company. 6. This field is located on the Detail sheet within this program. You next must set up a user account. Navigate to the Options tab. 114 Epicor ERP | 10. for more information. On the Company > External Company > Detail sheet. click the External Company. Repeat these steps for all the external companies that this user needs to access.. 8. Example AppServerDC:[//AppServer-host][:AppServer-port]/[AppService-name] AppServerDC://localhost:3091 6. click on the List sheet to verify that all external companies you want linked to this user record display. This user can now create and modify dashboards 5. Select the Dashboard Developer check box. Repeat these steps for all the external companies you need. and can also create a dashboard that will display data from these external companies. Create a User Account Next you need to link this external company (or companies) to the user running the dashboard. 7. Open the user record for the person that will run the dashboard.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide This value is identical to the Server File Directory value defined in System Agent Maintenance.. 1. 7. 4. 1. In the Definition ID field. 5. If necessary. select Developer. review the Business Activity Query Designer topics. In the Description field. Now set up the business activity query so that it pulls in the data you wish to display.700 115 . select New Query. You can now use the cross company BAQ on multi-company dashboards and custom reports. Select the Cross Company check box. Click the New button. 2. 3.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Create a Cross Company BAQ You next create a cross company business activity query (BAQ) that will pull data from multiple companies. Navigate to the General tab. Build a Multi-Company Dashboard You create multi-company dashboards within the Dashboard program. 3. 6. Click on the Query ID button to find and select the cross company business activity query (BAQ) that you wish to use. 9. The Dashboard Query Properties window displays. from the Tools menu. enter a name for the dashboard. Now click the Refresh button on the Standard toolbar. 4. Epicor ERP | 10. Click OK. From the New menu. 5. When you finish. select New Dashboard. Launch the Business Activity Query Designer. Launch the Dashboard program. 1.0. 8. This ensures that you are working in the Developer mode. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > Dashboard Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 6. From the New menu. enter a description of a dashboard. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > Setup > Business Activity Query Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. 2. Tip For information on how to create a BAQ. Monitor Data Flow You can use the Multi-Company Server Log. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process 2. • The Manufacturing company then builds configured products based on the configuration sales information received from the Sales company for the ordered item. 116 Epicor ERP | 10. • The enterprise sells configured items that are designated as manufactured parts in the Manufacturing companies. Review Multi-Company Direct Server Log If you are experiencing errors. create and review the Multi-Company Direct Server Log to see if the errors are being generated by the Multi-Company Direct Server process.0.700 . and designated as purchased parts in the Sales companies. and the manufacturing (method) rules that have been defined in. These tools can help you verify that data is flowing correctly and troubleshoot issues which may occur. Leverage these tools to ensure data flows correctly between companies as you need. Troubleshooting Tools The Multi-Site functionality installs with some troubleshooting tools you can use to identify and fix problems which may occur. or the Multi-Company Direct Server log to monitor the flow of data between multiple companies. These functions automate business situations in which a Sales company configures and sells products that are designed and manufactured in another company.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Data from the multiple companies you selected now appears within the query on your dashboard. these defined configurations are then used by the Sales companies when they receive customer orders for the items. This is a typical business scenario that can be automated using the multi-company configuration functions: • A multi-national enterprise based in the United States has several domestic and foreign Sales companies. Configurator in a Multi-Company Enterprise The Epicor application provides several sophisticated functions that allow you to manage configured parts in a multi-company enterprise. 1. Activate the log within the Multi-Company Direct Server process. and reside only in the Manufacturing company database. Navigate to this program. These companies can be located within the same database. Note Refer to the Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes > Configurator in a Multi-Company Enterprise section in the Configurator Technical Reference Guide for detailed information about the setup and operation of a multi-company Configurator. • The enterprise maintains the configurations in one of the Manufacturing companies. Click the Log Filename button. or can be located in separate external databases. and one or more domestic or foreign Manufacturing companies. You can then click this icon on your desktop to display the current log. 4. within External Company Maintenance. Activate the log within the Multi-Company Server process. Enter the name for the log file as well. When you want to see what is being generated in this log. You can now review any error messages which appear in this log. 6. You update these field relationships. Tip To make it easier to display this log. Tip To make it easier to display this log. The process generates the log. 6. Epicor ERP | 10. create a shortcut icon for it. Menu Path: System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Server Process 2. When you want to see what is being generated in this log. open the log file. Navigate to this program. Find and select the directory path where you want to generate this log. You can then click this icon on your desktop to display the current log.0. you can update the field to field relationships so global fields update equivelent fields withing the current company. Click the Submit button to save your changes to the process. You do this on the Translations sheet by first selecting the table and then the field you need to translate. The process generates the log. Global Record Translations Because of customizations and other changes. To correct this issue. 3. Click the Submit button to save your changes to the process. 1. Enter the name for the log file as well.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes 3. Click OK. create a shortcut icon for it. 5. 4. Click the Log Filename button. the fields used on global records may not match between companies. You can now review any error messages which appear in this log.700 117 . create and review the Multi-Company Server Log to see if the errors are being generated by the Multi-Company Server process. Click OK. 5. Review Multi-Company Server Log If you are experiencing errors. Find and select the directory path where you want to generate this log. open the log file. or translations. You then define the translation for the field you need. Any translations that have been assigned to this field appear in the Translations List grid. Rather than update the record in the source company and re-run a process. payments. and select New Translation. Repeat these steps for other fields you need to translate within the current company. click the Down Arrow next to the New button. Fixing Incoming Record Errors The Integrated Table Workbench is a key tool you leverage to correct any errors which occur on incoming global records. 11. Fields you can translate in this table appear in the Fields List grid.0. Enter the Database Value you need from the external company database. Continue to load in other external company records and make field relationship translations as you need. click Save. highlight the field. and payment instruments • customer records • supplier records 118 Epicor ERP | 10. 5. select the Default Value check box. 3. This program first displays a summary of the errors it has received on specific incoming records. Enter information about the external company on the External Company Maintenance > Detail sheet. When you finish. 6. Launch External Company Maintenance. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance 2.Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Global Record Translations . This maintenance tool can help you efficiently resolve errors which may occur during multi-company processes. The global records which pass between the external company and the current company now update as expected. Click the Translations tab. 10. payments.Process Follow the steps on this topic to translate field relationships between an external company record and the current company. Use this workbench when an incoming record is not complete or contains some other error. Select a field from the Fields List. Use this program to modify the following incoming records: • accounts payable invoices. To assign a translation to a field. 8. 9. and payment instruments • accounts receivable invoices. then both validate and then register the record within the current company. You can then navigate to the sheet which contains the record. 7. you can reconcile the discrepancy within the current company using the Integrated Table Workbench. make the changes you need. 1. Enter the Inbound Value which will display field data within the current company. Scroll through the list and select a table in the Tables List grid. If you want this translation to be the default for the current company.700 . 4. The record is now updated and active within the current company. click the Refresh button to make sure you have caught all of the current errors. Tip The Multi-Company Direct Server Process (or Multi-Company Server Process) continues to run. 4. The current errors display on the Summary sheet.Process Use the process documented on this topic to correct errors on incoming multi-company records. Click on the Actions menu and select Validate. 7.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Company/Multi-Site Processes • part records • purchase orders and PO suggestions • shipping receipts • multi-company journals • currencies • currency rate types and exchange rates Fixing Incoming Record Errors . Review these errors to identify the records you need to modify. Navigate to the sheet which contains the records you need to modify. Click Save on the Standard toolbar. Modify the record as you need. 2. 1.0. 6. Before you exit this program. Navigate to the Integrated Table Workbench. Now you need to make sure your changes have corrected the error. For example. You are notified either if the record is valid or if it contains any errors. Click on the Actions record and select Register. If the error on the incoming record is fixed.700 119 . 8. 5. and may send additional errors to the Integrated Table Workbench. you need to add this record to the current company. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > Integrated Table Workbench Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Epicor ERP | 10. if you receive an error on a global customer record. 3. Repeat these steps to correct errors on other incoming records. click on the Customer tab. • Dynamic Segments (Business Entities) .0.Identifies the account category that is used to determine other characteristics. EAST. including category. use these accounts when you need to revalue transactional currency amounts into other currency amounts. you can use natural account values to define currency accounts. dynamic. exchange rates. You create and edit categories within COA Category Maintenance. and controlled account segment values. • Dynamic Segments (Reference Types) Values . Use this program to define the following: • Natural Account Values . For example. Use General Ledger Account Maintenance to generate the general ledger accounts for COAs. normal balance. use Account Segment Values to define the NORTH. Controlled segment values defined in this program are available to you when you enter accounts in programs such as AP Adjustment and Cash Receipts. Items like books.700 . you can set a segment for a product line to expire when the product line is discontinued.Posting rules set a segment value based on the business entity indicated in a posted transaction. Account Segment Values • Category . and sites are described in this section.When you associate a reference type with a chart of accounts (COA) segment. You can assign many values to natural account segments. Account Segment Values Use Account Segment Values to define natural. Tip Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance creates the segments that display in this program. For example.Natural account values typically reflect the structure of the financial statements for the company. dynamic segments use the business entity functionality to set segment values. and so on. Categories determine how the application maintains account balances and the accounts that supply values for financial statements. • Controlled Segment Values . and WEST values for the segment. GL controls. • Effective Dates . You must define a category for each natural account segment. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Segment Values Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the account segment values functionality in the following programs. SOUTH. you can select a segment value for a posted transaction. You cannot define values for dynamic segments that reference the installed business entities. For example.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components This section of the Multi-Site TechnicalCompany Setup Reference Guide documents the primary components you use to set up your companythe multi-site functionality.Controlled segments record the primary financial history of the company. manual entry restrictions. 120 Epicor ERP | 10. define a controlled segment in COA Structure Maintenance to track a company division.Use active (effective) dates so the COA can reflect company structure or business changes. Define the currency revaluations that occur when a transaction currency differs from the currency used in a report.UI. At year end..Applies exchange rate settings used when consolidation journals are generated from the COA that contains the category. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Entry Restricted Functions Available modifiers: • Restricted Function -.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Normal Balance . your Epicor application can capture exchange gains and losses for natural accounts defined as currency accounts.dll (for example.0. You define which functions are restricted within Restricted Function Maintenance. Erp. the application zeros balances in income statement accounts and maintains balances in balance sheet accounts. • Normal Balance . to track when a seasonal product line is active. • Type . When reports are run.Click the Browse.Indicates if the account is a debit or credit. When you designate a selected function is restricted. You can override this setting in Account Segment Values. select the .dll files for your Epicor application.Determines whether the account segments which use this category appear as a debit or credit on a financial statement. Restricted Function Maintenance Use this program to define the processes. You only define this value on natural account segments. Launching this search program displays all of the . Use this functionality. COA Category Maintenance Use this program to define the categories you use with natural account segments in Account Segment Values. Epicor ERP | 10. • Restrictions -. and the To Date field to define the time span during which the current account segment is active. • Effective Dates -. or functions. the Effective From field. for example.Prevents use of a natural account account segment when users manually enter journal entries for a specific function. for which you need to restrict manual journal entry.700 121 . Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > COA Category Available modifiers: • Consolidation Type .dll) which you need to define as restricted.Use the Active check box. The GL Report Wizard uses this setting when creating financial statements.APInvoiceEntry. button to find and select a specific application function you want to restrict. you can then use the Restrictions sheet within Account Segment Values to indicate which functions are restricted for a specific account segment.Indicates whether this category is for a Balance Sheet or an Income Statement.. The radio button option you select indicates accounts associated with the current category are either temporary or permanent. • Transaction Currencies -. days) has passed into the overall terms period. SERVICES. the account segment can be used to record transaction values. Each discount period has a specific percentage that is valid for a specific span of time.0. Together. Effective Dates If the current date is on or between the Effective From Date and To Date values. you define the values TOOLS. Enter as many discount percentage periods as necessary. To begin setting up the purchasing terms. FINANCE. Each purchasing terms code defines a time period and a schedule of discount percentage periods. natural accounts can have: • Currency accounts • Rate types for credit and debit transactions • Multiple transaction currencies with revaluation logic • Relationships between the natural account segment and other controlled segments • Restricted application functions to prevent manual journal entries Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the account segment values functionality. You need to create a controlled segment that designates company divisions in the account codes. number of payments. and OEM for the segment. and discounts that apply to supplier invoices. Note also that the discounts have the same types as the term codes: • Days 122 Epicor ERP | 10. The controlled segment values are then available when users enter accounts in programs such as AP Adjustment and Cash Receipts Entry. select one of the following purchasing term code types: • Days • Days of Month • End of X Month(s) + Y Day(s) Each purchasing terms code can have one or multiple discount periods. Purchasing Terms Maintenance Use Purchasing Terms Maintenance to define terms that define the frequency.700 .Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Logic/Algorithms The account segment values functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. To do this. based on how much time (months. the discounts gradually reduce the percentages multiplied against invoices. Natural Accounts A natural account must have: • a category • a normal balance Optionally. Logic/Algorithms The AP (purchase) functionality uses this logic to calculate its results." Any invoices assigned these payment terms would. The terms for that supplier apply to payments the company sends to the supplier.0. In order for inter-company trading to work properly. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Purchasing Terms • Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Purchasing Terms Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the AP terms functionality in the following programs. Purchasing Terms Maintenance You create the purchasing terms you need for inter-company trading through this program. Terms code "01" is assigned a number of payments of "3" and due days of "30.Use this drop-down list to select the purchasing terms you will use with this customer record.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Days of Month • End of X Month(s) + Y Day(s) You can select a default purchasing term for each supplier.700 123 . Select purchasing terms identical to the selling terms you define on the customer record involved in the inter-company trade partnership. Epicor ERP | 10. Optionally. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Supplier Items you modify: • Terms -. You use both terms records on the customer and supplier records involved in the inter-company trading partnership. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the AP (purchase) terms functionality. Be sure to create purchasing terms which are identical to the selling terms. the AP terms record selected on the supplier record must match the AR terms record selected on the customer record. Supplier Maintenance You select the purchasing terms on the Supplier-Detail sheet. payments can force application of the best discount associated with the term. need to be paid in three installments. by default. due thirty days apart. A terms record is required for each customer. and number of payment installments. Select default payment terms for customers and on AR invoices. applicable discounts. Together. When creating a customer record. Terms define the due dates. Each accounts receivable (AR) code defines a time period and a discount percentage period schedule.700 . Each discount period has a specific percentage which is valid for a specific period. but you can override this selection. Note that the discounts have the same types as the term codes: • Days • Day Of Month • End of X Month(s) On Y Day(s) You do not need to select the same type for a term code and a discount assigned to this term code. days) within the overall terms period.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Terms Maintenance Use Terms Maintenance to establish conditions that define how customers pay their invoices (for example. payment frequency.0. the discounts gradually reduce the percentages based on the passed period (months. and payment frequency). discounts. a default terms record displays in the new record. AR terms display on sales orders and AR invoices. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Terms • Sales Management > Demand Management > Setup > Terms • Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Terms For CRM users. select one of the following term code types: • Days • Day Of Month • End of X Month(s) On Y Day(s) Determine whether the discount percentages for a term code calculate against partial or full payments. the percentage active on the payment date is used to calculate the discount amount. number of payments. Each terms code can have either one discount period or multiple discount periods. To begin setting up the selling terms. When a payment is received. the Main Menu appears as: • Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Terms 124 Epicor ERP | 10. Enter as many discount percentage periods as you need. Books are useful for recording transactions so they match the financial legal requirements for a specific country. fiscal calendar. chart of accounts.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the AR (selling) terms functionality in the following programs. its amounts can be applied to multiple books. and then use another book for posting the same transactions in the base currency the company uses. each due thirty days apart. A company can use multiple books to display the same financial information in multiple ways. Be sure to create selling terms which are identical to the purchasing terms.Use this drop-down list to select the selling terms you will use with this customer record. Logic/Algorithms The AR (selling) terms functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. reflecting the purpose for each book.700 125 .0. By default. books ignore most posting errors. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use theAR (selling) terms functionality. Epicor ERP | 10. and Retained Earnings account used to generate its financial statements. You can use one book to post transactions in a specific currency for reporting. These rules define error handling for journals posted to a specific book. Book Maintenance Book Maintenance defines the fiscal books a specific company uses. A book defines the currency. Each book can also have its own set of validation rules. In order for inter-company trading to work properly. You can change the defaults so the book blocks and logs errors as needed. Terms Maintenance You create the selling terms you need for inter-company trading through this program. Select selling terms identical to the purchasing terms you define on the supplier record involved in the inter-company trade partnership. Use Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance to create a chart of accounts (COA) which matches the structure your country requires. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Customer Items you modify: • Terms -. When you implement the Epicor application. the AR terms record selected on the customer record must match the AP terms record selected on the supplier record. When a transaction is entered. You use both terms records on the customer and supplier records involved in the inter-company trading partnership. Terms code "30-60-90" is assigned a Number of Payments of 3 and Due on Day of 30. Customer Maintenance You select the purchasing terms on the Billing-Detail sheet. Invoices that use these terms have a default payment schedule of three payments. carefully consider the role each book plays in the financial management and reporting within a specific company. It also describes the values you can change for this item. • Fiscal Calendar . review the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide in Application Help. so you may need to implement additional books. For information on how to create and update posting rules.Books can record financial transactions or consolidate to other books. Use Book Maintenance to create new books or modify existing books. • Error Handling for Journals . • Rounding Tolerance Criteria . An insurance company might use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) to value investments and other items for one report and use National Association of Insurance Commissioners guidelines for another book. or several books can share the same COA. and balance maintenance for segments other than the natural account. COA. Once a posting process runs through the book. 126 Epicor ERP | 10. you can specify rounding tolerance criteria as well as an account to which transactions will post currency differences. When the posting process runs. For financial reporting. type. calendar.The book currency can be used on financial reports and in consolidations. Error transactions display in the Review Journal.) The book also determines the retained earnings account. the Epicor application blocks posting of invalid journals and continues to process the remaining journals in the batch. Standard books record the financial activity of the company. You can modify a book's details (description.Use the Validations sheet to ensure the transactions are valid. but will only post in the specified book currency. State or provincial regulations can also impact reporting.For each book. • GL Transaction Mapping . For example. The COA defines valid general ledger accounts.The fiscal calendar determines valid apply dates for each business transaction. Use Book Maintenance to define the following: • Book Type .0. available dynamic segments. • Chart of Accounts (COA) . Consolidation books mediate the transfer of consolidation journals between two standard books. Note You can also update the posting rules each book uses to record general ledger transactions. Update posting rules for each book within GL Transaction Type Maintenance.700 . Books can store journals in additional transaction currencies. you can only change the book description. You determine the COA map and transactional currency to use as well as determine which GL transaction types are affected by this revision.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Example Use the Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS) to depreciate a physical asset for tax reporting. a validation rule can alert you when the Apply Date for a transaction falls within a closed fiscal period. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Book • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Book Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the Books functionality from the Main Menu. Journal amounts post in the currency defined on the book. • Book Currency . Example Leverage multiple books so your companies can value items differently in financial and statutory reports. The Epicor application maintains periodic balances for segments based on the fiscal calendar.Set up GL transaction mapping from your source (Main) book to a secondary book.Each book can have a different COA. Each book displays its own depreciation results. (The natural account maintains continuous balances. the same asset is depreciated using straight-line depreciation. currency) until a journal posts to its COA. a chart of accounts. These calendars define the fiscal periods used by the application to record transactions. • Warning-. • Calendar-. if a journal has an Apply Date which occurs in a closed period. this value creates an account mask so the account's balances can transfer to multiple retained earnings accounts. You create chart of accounts within Chart of Account Maintenance. • Autocorrect-. Epicor ERP | 10.Causes the journal to post.700 127 . Available options: • Error-. The application substitutes the segment in the income statement account for the corresponding segment in the retained earnings account.A retained earnings option. The COA defines valid general ledger accounts. You can view the transaction in the Review Journal. A warning message displays in the Review Journal detailing the automatic change. • Book Currency-.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Book Modifiers you define in this program: • Account Mask-.Designates a balance sheet account as the standard account used for retained earnings for the book. • Action-. books can also store journals using transaction currencies as needed for multi-currency reporting. This book automatically display on all reports and trackers for the current company. The application updates the retained earnings account balance with postings to the COA's revenue and expense accounts.Select this option to cause the application to use a pre-defined process to correct the error.Defines the chart of account (COA) you wish to use with the book.Select the fiscal calendar you wish to use with the current book. All journal amounts post in the currency you select on the book. the application changes the Apply Date to the current period. Logic/Algorithms The Books functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. • Type-.Causes the journal to post. You create fiscal calendars within Fiscal Period Maintenance. and balance maintenance for segments other than the natural account. but a warning message appears in the error log. • Main Book-. this value defines how the application handles invalid journals that post to the book.Blocks posting of the journal. For multi-currency reporting. • Retained Earnings Account-. • Standard Account-.Indicates whether the book is the default book for the current company.Determines the primary function of the book. The application substitutes the segment in the retained earnings account for the corresponding segment in the income statement account. • Ignore-. The book currency can be used on financial reportsand in consolidations.0. Each book can have a different COA or several books can share the same COA. GL transaction types use these items to calculate the financial results for each book.You can use books to either record financial transactions or consolidate other books. but no entry appears in the error log. available dynamic segments. This option is the default setting for most posting errors.A Retained Earnings modifier.A validation rules modifier. Books contain a fiscal calender. and a book currency. this value creates an account mask for a retained earnings account so it can display balances from a split COA segment.Select the currency you wish to use with the book from this drop-down list. • Chart of Account-. For example. The third segment is optional and defines cost centers. the following balances exist in COA revenue and expense accounts. Account Amount 4010-MP-100 240 4010-MP-200 500 4020-MP-100 100 4020-LA-100 300 3010-LA-100 -500 3010-MP-100 -1200 The application updates the retained earnings account when transferring opening balances to the new fiscal year. You use segment substitution to split the balance in the standard retained earnings account 3070. LA and MP. A book uses a COA with a second mandatory segment that defines two divisions.700 . At year-end close.0.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Books functionality. Account Retained Earnings Account Amount 4010-MP 3070-MP 740 4020-MP 3070-MP 100 3010-MP 3070-MP -1200 Total to 3070-MP 4020-LA 3070-LA 300 3010-LA 3070-LA -500 Total to 3070-LA 128 -360 -200 Epicor ERP | 10. Finalize your BAQ by testing it using the Analyze sheet. Queries can be used to generate Reports. and field types. Based on the conditions defined in the BPM directive. Leveraging this functionality does require some fundamental knowledge of database concepts such as table relationships. For example. BAQ execution results can also be exported as . Some application tools are available which can help you find the database information you need. you could use this functionality to verify data is being correctly entered into the database. Tip You can periodically export BAQ results as either an . Epicor ERP | 10. Since this item is a sensitive query. correct any errors before you use this query on a dashboard or mobile device.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Business Activity Query Designer Use the Business Activity Query (BAQ) Designer to create personalized queries (BAQs) and to copy system queries so you can modify them. This knowledge helps you create queries that have good performance and display the results you want. To do this. review the Executive Query and Executive Dashboards topics. You can create updatable BAQs for data entry. so you can edit their data in third party applications as well. licensed in your environment. These BAQs can be placed on a smart client dashboard and/or used on a mobile device. such as an iPhone or a Blackberry. and cross company BAQs that pull data from several companies at the same time. You need to build one query that lists all security IDs in the system for the current company. refer to the Business Activity Query Export Process topic. These queries can display a BAQ's data through various graph formats. The functionality has some security options. Use the Query Builder sheets to define which tables you want to include in your main query. Example You are in charge of your company’s security. For more information. as you can create queries only available for your personal use. potential subqueries and what relationship they have with each other. You can also create an updatable BAQ. If you have the Executive Analysis module. you can begin creating the query through the Business Activity Query Designer. Users then enter data through either the dashboard or the mobile device. Once you determine the information you want to display. first create your query and then export it using Business Activity Query Export Process. you do not select it as a shared query. records. displayed and updated through a dashboard and mobile devices. Queries can be read only tools which you can later place on a smart client dashboard for display on the Main Menu. Queries can be accessed in different ways throughout the Epicor ERP application. To learn more. You start by defining the information to display through your BAQ. you can also create Cross-Company queries which display data across companies. and then finding out which database tables contain the appropriate columns which hold this data.xml file or an ASCII file. included in application Searches. Business Process Management (BPM) directives can be created which monitor the data entered through an updatable BAQ. Advanced Features Advanced features are available for more BAQ functionality. you define this query as a shared query. Because you want everyone to be aware about the progress of the sales orders. you can create advanced displays for a Business Activity Query's data by creating multiple executive queries.700 129 . or create shared queries available to everyone within your company. global BAQs for use in different companies. You also define subquery parameters and decide which columns you want to display for the end user. executive queries that pull in complex views of data for dashboard display.0. and this new data updates records within the main database.xml or ASCII files. You next create a query that summarizes the status of current orders. various actions run automatically. If you have access to multiple companies. You can then place these BAQ's on multi-company dashboards to view the records generated by companies throughout your organization. If the user has access to multiple companies. you need to be assigned Dashboard Developer rights within User Account Maintenance. External Company Maintenance To pass data between cross company BAQs in different companies. Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the business activity query (BAQ) functionality in the following programs. • Cross Company .Select this check box to indicate this BAQ can be used by other companies. the BAQ is placed on an internal multi-company table and automatically replicated to companies set up for multi-company. After you define the business activity query. Users in these companies can then use the global BAQ on dashboards and BAQ reports. You do this by incorporating either global BAQs or cross company BAQs into a new dashboard. Business Activity Query Designer Use this program to create the BAQs you will later incorporate on global dashboards. You can connect to the application server directly or indirectly. Menu Path: System Management > Business Activity Queries > Business Activity Query Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. this query displays data from each company defined on the current user account. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > Dashboard Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. You then create the views required to display the data on the multi-company or global dashboard. global BAQ reports. click on the General sheet and select the following: • Global -. Important In order to create dashboards. The current user can then display data through the cross company BAQs linked to external companies set up on the current user account. 130 Epicor ERP | 10. and multi-company dashboards. you need to define the connection information on each external company record.700 . After you save this query.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > Setup > Business Activity Query Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Dashboard Use this program to create both global and multi-company dashboards. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance You enter the Server URL on the Connection pane.0.Select this check box to indicate this BAQ can display data from multiple companies at the same time. If you use consolidated purchasing. To do this. however. as you use it specify approved purchase amount limits for each buyer. To complete the report layout. you access the SQL Server Report Builder or a similar layout program. you indicate this BAQ can pull in data from other companies. Buyer Maintenance is a key setup program. Buyers are specified in the purchase orders you create. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > BAQ Report Designer Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.700 131 . Logic/Algorithms The business activity query functionality uses this logic to display data across multiple companies. Unlike the rest of the multi-site functionality. Instead. After you save this query. This BAQ is then replicated out to other companies set up for multi-company. Buyer Maintenance Use Buyer Maintenance to create records for buyers responsible for your company's purchasing activities. A buyer must first be defined as a system user and then added as an authorized user for the Buyer ID. you will also need to create identical buyer records within all of the companies that use the consolidated PO process. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > Setup > Buyer • Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Buyer • Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Setup > Buyer Epicor ERP | 10. • When you select the Global check box. You then define the report options for the report. the BAQ is stored on an internal multi-company table. cross company BAQs do not pass data through the multi-company process. this logic uses the server URL to pass information between the BAQ tables within the multiple companies.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components BAQ Report Designer You create global and multi-company BAQ reports through the BAQ Report Designer.0. The Buyer ID is used as a search or filter field for PO Suggestions and Part Class purchasing. you first select the global or cross company query. • When you select the Cross Company check box. you indicate this BAQ is available for use in other companies. K. COA maps can reflect minor changes you need between different charts of accounts. Typically. You create an identical record for K. Gibbs and her team will be in charge of consolidated purchases across these companies.C. When users create a consolidated PO. You next navigate to the child company and launch Buyer Maintenance.C.700 . COA maps are also easier to maintain. you create COA maps instead of modifying specific posting rules.Select this check box to indicate the curent buyer record can be used on consolidated purchase orders. You launch Buyer Maintenance in the parent company and enter K. Your organization wants to control purchasing and AP functions across multiple companies. the buyer record is an available option on the Buyer drop-down list for consolidated POs. they can select this buyer record.Select the buyer record you need from this drop-down list. Purchase Order Entry You create consolidated purchase orders through this program. To activate consolidated purchasing: • Consolidated Purchasing -.C. Gibbs and her team. Only buyers defined for consolidated purchasing display as options on this list. You first create the buyer record. When you select the Consolidated Purchasing check box within Buyer Maintenance. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the buyer functionality. Logic/Algorithms The buyer functionality uses this logic for the consolidated purchasing process.0. You can handle most posting process modifications through COA mapping. 132 Epicor ERP | 10. Buyer Maintenance Use this program to indicate which buyers (and their authorized users) can create consolidated purchase orders. so you are setting up the consolidating purchasing functionality. Mapping transforms a portion of one chart of accounts (COA) to a portion of another and eliminates the need to redefine the posting rules that create journals. You then add members of her team as authorized users.C. Gibbs displays as an option on the Buyer drop-down list.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the buyer functionality for consolidated POs in the following programs. To select the buyer: • Buyer -. Chart of Accounts Mapping Use Chart of Accounts Mapping to define maps used to transfer journals between different charts of accounts. Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Purchase Order Entry You create the consolidated purchase order by clicking the Down Arrow next to the New button and selecting New Consolidated PO. When a user creates a consolidated purchase order. Create the PO. K. Gibbs as a consolidated buyer. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Accounting Segment Mapping • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Accounting Segment Mapping Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the Chart of Accounts Maps functionality from the Main Menu. refer to the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide in the Application Help. Next.0. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management/General Ledger/Setup/Account Segment Mapping Modifiers you define in this program: • Map Type-.Links the source and target COAs through their account segments. As a result. all at the same time. journals that post to AP accounts in the financial book also post to the COA in the legal book. Once you make that decision. Use Chart of Accounts Mapping to create maps that transfer one COA to another COA. The consolidation process uses COA maps to link accounts from a source book to a target book. Once you establish this link. For information on how to do this. the Epicor application also converts the journal currency. You can set up mapping for entire account codes or for individual segments. Associate maps with a book and its posting rules within GL Transaction Type Maintenance. For more information on Chart of Accounts Mapping. Create a map with the financial book's COA as the source COA. and no rule modifications are needed.700 133 .Defines how the map links the two COAs. Example The company has a financial and a legal book that use different charts of accounts (COAs). If your book requires more complex posting changes. You also have the option in Book Maintenance to link a secondary book to a source book using the COA map you built. In GL Transaction Type Maintenance. Available options: • Account Segment Map-. add the secondary book with mapping to each individual GL transaction type by adding a revision in GL Transaction Type Maintenance. refer to the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide in the Application Help or the Posting Engine course. Once you create a COA map between books you need to determine which GL transaction types should post to both of these books. it makes the most sense to link the secondary book to your source (Main) book in Book Maintenance. Use the posting engine functionality to map a source COA to a target COA. Consolidation Definition Maintenance specifies the map a consolidation used. You want to post the same accounts payable (AP) journals to both COAs. • Automatically transfer posted journals between books. Tip Modify posting rules within GL Transaction Type Maintenance. Epicor ERP | 10. Associate the mapping document with the financial book.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Use COA maps to: • Create consolidation journals. This map links natural account segment values for AP accounts in the two COAs. When the currencies of the two books are different. This GL transaction type contains the posting rules which create journals for the financial book. It also describes the values you can change for this item. access the GL transaction type used to post AP journals. modify the posting rules for each affected GL transaction type. you can enable as many GL transaction types as you want. Tip If you plan to update multiple GL transaction types to post to a multiple books. revisions can only be added one transaction type at a time. The map links natural account segment values for AP accounts in the two COAs.0. Transactions posted to the corresponding source account post to this account. 134 Epicor ERP | 10. Logic/Algorithms The Chart of Accounts Maps functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. • Target Segment-. Transactions posted to accounts in the source COA also post to the target COA. Transactions posted to accounts in this COA also posts to the target COA.Designates the source COA for the map. Values defined for this segment map to values in the target segment.Defines the company to which the target COA is used. journals booked to AP accounts in the financial book also post to the COA in the legal book. You access the GL transaction type used to post accounts payable journals. Transactions posted to this segment post to the corresponding target segment. Each company book must have a COA.Specifies a value in the source segment. This transaction type contains rules used to create the journals for the financial book. you typically need two or more charts of accounts in each company. Indicate which COA is the Master. • TargetGLAccount-.Specifies a segment in the target COA.Specifies a general ledger account in the target COA. • Target Chart of Account-. Chart of Account Structure Maintenance Chart of Account Structure Maintenance defines the segment structure and characteristics for each Chart of Accounts (COA) you use within the current company. you create a map with the financial book's COA as the source COA.Specifies a general ledger account in the source COA. Use GL Control Maintenance to specify the journals and accounts used to post transactions within the COA. Values defined for this segment map to values in the source segment. or target. You want to post the same accounts payable journals to both COAs. When a book links with a COA. • Target Company-. • Source Chart of Account-. The application uses one or multiple charts of accounts to control account entry. In a multi-company environment.700 .Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • GL Account Map-. Books can be assigned different COAs or several books can share the same COA. The company has a financial and a legal book that use different COAs. COA maps are used by GL transaction types to move values from one COA in a source book to another COA in a target book. you can use the COA to post journals. • Target Segment Value-. Transactions booked to the corresponding source segment book to this segment. As a result.Designates the receiving. • Source Segment-. To do this.Links the source and target COAs using entire GL accounts. You associate the COA map with the financial book. A source COA can transfer transactions to target COAs in multiple companies. Transactions posted to this account post to the corresponding target account. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Chart of Accounts Maps functionality. a master COA contains the primary list of accounts.Specifies a value in the target segment.Specifies a segment in the source COA. • Source Segment Value-. • SourceGLAccount-. a master COA and a consolidation COA. COA for the map. Each segment can be up to 50 characters in length. supplier. When you implement financials in the Epicor application. To define the specific values each segment uses . use Account Segment Values Maintenance to define other natural account options. If a segment is a natural account. and other entities. When a segment is defined as a natural account. dynamic segments to a business entity. A natural account segment defines the chart segment used with the account. you must indicate which COA is the Master. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Chart of Accounts • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Chart of Accounts • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Chart of Accounts • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Chart of Accounts • Financial Management > Payroll > Setup > Chart of Accounts • Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Chart of Accounts For CRM users. Your master COA is typically assigned to your company's Main Book. COA Segments can be natural. part. Each GL account can have up to 20 definable account segments. and you can define a number of values. the Natural Account indicator is active on the Detail sheet. The first segment you save on a COA automatically saves as its natural account. Generate specific account combinations within General Ledger Account Maintenance.0. Controlled segments record the primary financial history of the company while dynamic segments record temporary. One book uses a COA for government reporting. controlled.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example Government regulations require reports to use an account structure different from the one you use for corporate reporting.such as category. In Chart of Accounts Maintenance. Link. unique business activity. They can display in any order and that order can be changed at any time (Run the Rebuild Display GL Account process to update the display throughout the application). or reference. the application zeros balances in income statement accounts and maintains balances for balance sheet accounts. Once you start to use a COA. you can no longer add a controlled segment to it but you can always add dynamic segments to a COA in use.use Account Segment Values Maintenance.700 135 . dynamic. which is a table that records data placed against customer. In this situation. and natural account options . normal balance. a master COA contains the primary list of accounts. You can create as complex an account structure as you need for each COA. The maximum length for an account is 200 characters. the other uses a COA for corporate reporting. project. the Main Menu appears as: • Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Chart of Accounts Epicor ERP | 10. use Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance. or optional for data entry. While you indicate where the natural account segment is located in the account structure in this program. Tip Use Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance to design the primary account structure for each COA. such as Effective Date and Normal Balance. including delimiters. the COAs which the company's subsidiaries use can supply values to a management COA that contains a limited number of accounts. In another scenario. To indicate a segment is self-balancing. carefully consider the role each COA and book you create will play in your company's financial management. define two books. for each segment. All the fields available in the table you selected for the Segment Value Field display on this list. • Description Field Name . Typically you use this option for project accounting where a current balance is kept independently from the fiscal year. • Include in Summary Balance . When you use summary balances.Indicates the segment must be included in general ledger accounts. part or other business entity.Determines whether the COA segment maintains year-end balances for expense and revenue accounts. 136 Epicor ERP | 10. • Optional . Balance Logic • Include in Detail Balance -. All primary business entities are available for selection on this drop-down list when you select the Use Business Entity check box. • Entry Control . By default.Defines the database table used for the business entity. you can maintain income statement balances which are independent from the financial year. The posting rules which reference the business entity set the segment values during the posting process.0. It also requires less storage space on your hard drives.Defines the database field for the business entity. as less accounts generate during the posting process. You can select tables which contain a single-value primary key. you indicate the segment uses the values recorded within the business entity's table and fields to calculate the segment values.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the chart of accounts functionality in the following program.Use this check box to determine whether this COA segment summarizes balances for use on reports and trackers. the database stores fewer general ledger transactions. Available options: • Mandatory .Designates the segment is either optional or mandatory for each natural account value. This segment type can define subsidiary ledgers for accounts receivable and accounts payable control accounts. You can use Daily Balances Setup to enable the storage of daily segment balances for a book. Logic/Algorithms The COA functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. When you select a customer. This saves system resources. Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance The following modifiers are used within this program: • Business Entity .700 . When you select this option.Determines whether this COA segment maintains balances for use on reports and trackers. You can only select this option on reference-type segments. • Reference Account Mask .If this check box is active (selected).Defines the business entity referenced by a dynamic segment. supplier. the application zeros balances in temporary accounts at year end.Indicates the segment is optional or mandatory for an account mask defined in GL COA Reference Type. • Natural Account . • Include in Detail Balance . • Opening Balance on P/L . You define natural account values within Account Segment Values Maintenance.General ledger accounts which do not have this segment may still post amounts to the general ledger. • Segment Value Field .Determines whether the segment must appear in general ledger account codes. this account segment totals its values on a daily basis. Instead of zeroing out the balances. this account segment totals its values on over a period of days. The GL Report Wizard uses entries in this program to automatically create the company's balance sheet and income statement. The Epicor application zeros balances in income statement accounts and maintains balances for balance sheet accounts. Use COA Category Maintenance to: • Determine how to maintain balances for associated accounts. Epicor ERP | 10. Select the Net Income check box for a category to designate it as the retained earnings entry on reports. define Assets. Liabilities. This association determines how the Epicor application maintains account balances and the accounts that supply financial statement values. this account segment maintains an opening balance for the next fiscal year. the other uses a COA for corporate reporting. You can define financial statements without the use of categories or the wizard. When a GL control type is linked to the Customer business entity. including business entities. COA Category Maintenance COA Category Maintenance defines chart of accounts (COA) categories associated with natural accounts in Account Segment Values.700 137 . These settings ensure the correct placement of the categories on the report. Reference Entity Options Business entities define various items. Example Customer is a business entity. this account segment displays the final amount from the previous fiscal year.0. Example Government regulations require reports use an account structure different than the one you use for corporate reporting. Its Description Field Name value is Name. suppliers. In this situation. the GL control type's account and journal contexts only evaluate data contained in the CustID table. define two books. • Designate the balance sheet category used to report net income from the income statement. these categories group other categories and display a total of their sub-accounts. The Assets category has a normal debit balance. which are required for system GL control types. COAs the company's subsidiaries use can supply values to a management COA that contains a limited number of accounts. On the balance sheet. Business entities define the primary database tables and their fields used in the posting process. • Opening Balance on P/L -. The account and journal contexts defined on the GL control type then filter the accounts and journal codes generated for each of its child GL controls. and Equity categories.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Include in Summary Balance -. such as customers.If this check box is active (selected). In another scenario. • Define the structure and formatting of financial statements. First. This reduces the overall number of account details which the Epicor application generates. and so the static table it contains is the CustID table. and projects. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the COA functionality. Entries in this program define descriptions that display in the reports and whether an entry displays as a debit or credit. while the Liabilities and Equity categories have credit balances.If this check box is active (selected). Example Use COA Category Maintenance and the GL Report Wizard to create a corporate balance sheet. These categories have no parent. One book uses a COA for government reporting. Corporate balance sheets typically use Retained Earnings to describe this category. The GL Report Writer uses this field to structure statements. At year end.Use this drop-down list to select the COA for which you want to add or update a category. • Type-. • Consolidation Type-. You can define as many subcategory levels as you need. You have two options -. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management/General Ledger/Setup/COA Category Modifiers you define in this program: • Chart of Account-. You can modify the categories copied from the template to create a set of categories appropriate for the COA. • Parent Category-. the balance of the account associated with the Accounts Payable category is used to calculate the total for the Liabilities category. Typically corporate balance sheets use Retained Earnings to describe this category. Note If you change the account category on a natural segment from Balance Sheet to Income Statement. Lastly. Logic/Algorithms The Chart of Account Categories functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.Use this drop-down list to define the exchange rate settings used when consolidation journals generate from the selected COA. • Net Income-. The GL Report Wizard uses the type to determine the financial statement where the category appears. Use the Copy COA Categories option from the Actions menu to copy a set of categories from one COA to other charts of accounts. the application zeros balances in income statement accounts and maintains balances in balance sheet accounts. COA categories define the natural accounts used for account segment values. and set it as the first entry in the Liabilities category. It also describes the values you can change for this item.Determines the position of the current category in relation to the other child categories on financial statements.Balance Sheet and Income Statement.Use this drop-down list to define the main category under which this child category displays. As a result. 138 Epicor ERP | 10. Use Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance to create new COAs or modify existing COAs. select Liabilities as its parent.0. • Normal Balance-. define sub-categories for Accounts Payable.Determines whether accounts associated with the category are temporary or permanent. this may affect reported profits.Use these options to define whether this category carries either a Debit or a Credit balance. • Sequence-.700 .Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Define the Accounts Payable category. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > COA Category Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the Chart of Account Categories functionality from the Main Menu. Use a set of categories as a template to save work.Indicates whether the category reports net income values. The Epicor application places no restrictions on the number of sub-category levels allowed. As a result. you would define sub-categories for Accounts Payable. You can then display the new company in this program and configure it as necessary. You first use Company Maintenance to define overall options like email setup. Tip You can purchase a Multi-Site license that enables you to set up multiple companies within Company Configuration. Note that you cannot create new companies within this program.0. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Company Configuration Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the company functionality in the following programs. Use these options to define how this company will interact with the module licensed for it. and Equity categories. This makes sure the same cost method is used for all the sites linked to this cost set. You then use Company Configuration to define how the company interacts with the various modules you have licensed. First. Liabilities. Typically. Company Configuration Use Company Configuration to define the module options for companies in the Epicor application. The Assets category has a normal balance of debit while Liabilities and Equity have credit balances. These categories have no parent. Multi-site fFunctions you can modify within Company Configuration: • Cost IDs -. The cost set is then used for the cost method calculations for all the parts manufactured within the sites linked to the cost set. You define a category named Accounts Payable. Epicor ERP | 10.If you can set up multiple companies. and set it as the first entry in the Liabilities category. On the balance sheet. You instead set up new companies within the Epicor Administration Console. they group other categories and display a total of their sub-accounts.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Chart of Account Categories functionality. one company record is created by default. the balance of the account associated with the Accounts Payable category is used to calculate the total for the Liabilities category. launch Company Configuration within each company to modify its record. Company Configuration You use this program to define how the current company interacts with the modules licensed for your organization. document attachments. To do this. select Liabilities as its parent. These settings ensure the correct placement of the categories on the report. first create the company within the Epicor Administration Console. You use this program and the GL Report Wizard to create a corporate balance sheet. you define Assets. and external BAQ sources. When you install the Epicor application.A site cost identifier defines a reference to a cost set.700 139 . You select cost IDs on the Modules > All Modules > General sheet. 0.Defines the rate type used for all financial transactions that involve the assets of the current company .You must indicate the default chart of accounts which will be used for GL transactions within this company. You select this option on the the Modules>All Modules>General sheet.Defines the rate type used for employee expenses that require international transactions.Defines the rate type used for all sales orders and AR invoices. along with Service Bus.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Default Rate Types -. • Fixed Assets . you must activate either the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (or the Multi-Company Server Process. data from outbound tables in the source company are sent to inbound tables in the target company. • Inventory and Production . Be sure to select the same company identifier on all the companies who will use central payment functionality. You must create at least one fiscal calendar and then link this calendar to the new company. • Purchase and Expenditure . and computers. • Payroll . you must add a company value to the database. • Cash Management . • Sales and Invoicing . In order to share data across multiple companies.700 . 140 Epicor ERP | 10.Fiscal calendars define the years and periods used for financial reporting.items such as facilities. which requires you to define the Server URL within External Company Maintenance. You select these default rate types on the Modules > All Modules > Currency Rates sheet: • Company General . Each company interacts through the Multi-Company Direct Server Process (or Multi-Company Server Process) . The exception is the multi-company dashboard process. • Parent Company -. Each company record has a separate set of tables which contain records independent from other companies. • COA Master -. You select fiscal calendars on the Detail sheet.Use these drop-down lists to indicate which currency rate type will be used for a specific financial area within the company. or other financial areas. Identical global business activity queries (BAQs) available in both companies can then pass their data through the AppServer connection. You do this within the Epicor Administration Console. Epicor Administration Console Before you can create a new company within your Epicor application. production equipment. so it is launched from your Start button: Start>All Programs>Epicor Tools>Epicor Administration Console Logic/Algorithms The company functionality uses the following logic to facilitate multi-site processes. • Fiscal Calendars -. you set up either an indirect or a direct connection between an external company and the current company. When this process is active. It defines the company record which will process central AP payments. This modifier is found on the Modules>Finance>Accounts Payable sheet.Indicates the rate type used for all stock quantities and production expenses that occur between sites located in different countries. purchasing.Defines the rate type used for all purchase orders and AP invoices.Indicates the rate type used as the default for all transactions that do not fall in the sales.This identifier activates the central AP payment functionality within the company. For this feature. You can then send data between the multiple company records created within your database. if the companies reside on different databases).Defines the rate type used for multiple currency transactions that involve cash amounts. This program is located outside your Epicor application. production. such as United States Dollars (USD) or Russian Rouble (RUR). Tip If you are setting up currencies for use in multiple companies. Each currency record defines the primary information needed to generate financial transactions with customers and suppliers in a specific country. be sure to verify the currency codes match on the currency master records used by all companies. down. You can also decide not to use a rounding rule against a specific value type. but you need to add the three other companies. The selected currency becomes the default on any transaction with the specific customer Bill to location or supplier. Use this functionality when you need to set up general ledger consolidations between multiple companies within your organization. purchase orders. you launch the Epicor Administration Console. A Currency GL control type and GL control can be assigned to each currency record. or to the nearest value.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the company functionality.the United States. Your parent company. Your organization. define its base currency. Each record has both a Currency Code and a Currency ID value. You can round these values up. You then create a Epicor ERP | 10. quotes.0. and invoices. and Extended Price. Other companies within your database can link to this global record and pull in the initial currency record. such as its name. For example. To do this. the Currency Code defines the entire currency record for uses such as consolidation and other application processes. you create a child company which uses US dollars. was created by default during installation. four companies display on the Main Menu tree view. this record indicates US dollars in the new company. Override this default currency by selecting a different currency on sales orders. This information is then leveraged by the Epicor application for any transaction conducted using this currency. You can now modify each company as you need within Company Configuration. GL controls define the specific journals and accounts which record transactions in this currency. The first currency you create is by default assigned the BASE currency code and then you enter a currency ID of USA. MAIN. A typical error can occur when you set up a new child company. Portugal. and China. Unit Tax. Be sure to enter the main currency this company uses. You create the following company identifiers: • GVUSA • GVPTL • GVCHN When you launch the Epicor application. Currency Master Maintenance Use Currency Master Maintenance to enter and update each currency in which your organization conducts business. A currency record contains the key details about the currency. You are also ready to set up the multi-company processes required by your organization. The Currency ID defines how the currency displays on various reports and programs within the company. Currencies can also be defined as a global currency for use in a multi-company environment.700 141 . You can create currencies for a specific company or global currencies for your entire organization. Your corporate headquarters are located in Belgium. You want to represent these companies separately within the Epicor application. description. has companies in three countries -. A currency record can also contain the rounding rules it uses for various value types such as Unit Price. When you create a new company. GL control types provide the template for the account and journal contexts used for transactions against the currency record. and currency symbol. Assign currency records to supplier records and to specific Bill to locations on customer records. Global Vision. and the exchange rate is calculated as a zero value. Technically this currency is also considered a reporting currency by the application. If at any point you make a change to a transactional currency. Transactional currencies are used for records created for external transactions with customers and suppliers. you can have as many document currencies as you need for all the localities in which you conduct business. If your organization conducts business in other countries. • Reporting . and you enter a currency code and a currency ID with USA values. you run quarterly and annual reports in the base and reporting currencies. the Epicor application will treat these records as separate currencies. or record. This currency is the default used for all transactions within the company. displaying financial results with the correct currency values.A currency your company uses to store. Only one currency can be defined as the base currency for a company. and Reporting Currencies Each active currency can be used as a transactional or a reporting currency: • Transactional . Transactional.0. as it is the default currency used on all transactions generated within a specific company.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide currency record in the parent company to consolidate with this child company. 142 Epicor ERP | 10. Currency Master Maintenance Modifiers you define in this program: • Base Currency-. • Base . Base. These currencies are used to calculate the final income and expense amounts generated by the business of a specific company. in order to conduct business on that record. This process updates any reporting currency transactions linked to the updated transaction currency. and internal transactions with sites and companies within your organization. run the Remove Reporting Currency process.A currency used on a specific document. however. or report.700 . A transactional currency is also called a Document currency.The primary currency used by a company. Business transactions are recorded in all four currencies. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Currency Master • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Currency Master • Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Currency Master Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Important Each company can only have three reporting currencies and one base currency. Because these currency code values are different. amounts for financial reports. To undo these changes. The base currency is unique.Indicates that the currency is the primary currency used by the company. Use these currencies in published reports and financial documents. These amounts are officially expressed through a reporting currency. When the application cannot find another currency to use for a transaction. Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the currency entry functionality in the following program. You can have up to three reporting currencies for each company. it calculates the amounts using the base currency defined for the company. click the Actions menu and run the Add Reporting Currency process. purchase orders. • Scale Factor-. • Number of Decimals-. assets. Global Currency When a currency is defined as a global currency. • Reporting Currency-. This currency then becomes available on Currency lists throughout your Epicor application.Select this check box to indicate the current company can no longer use this currency.59 If you use scale factors. but all display rates are entered by users and are shown using this factor value. After the global currency record displays within the child company.Indicates the special character used for this currency.Defines the value used to modify the actual exchange rate in order to display amounts for a currency in a more readable format. updates to the global currency record need to be entered manually within the child companies as well. and banks. You must select at least one currency as a reporting currency for each company. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Source Scale Factor: 1 • Target Currency: JPY Epicor ERP | 10. If you do not use a scale factor. This value appears on reports and programs near the currency amounts. general ledger.Select this check box to indicate the exchange rate values for this currency can be updated.007716 SGD • Actual Rate: 129. The actual rates within the database are not changed by this value.Defines how many decimals this currency can display for unit cost amounts.Indicates whether this currency can be used by other companies within your organization. You are converting a transaction from Singapore Dollars (SGD) to Japanese Yen (JPY). Users cannot create new transactions against this currency. Use this functionality to reflect the decimal places required by some currencies. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the currency functionality. and any amounts posted through inventory. that only initial currency values pull into the child company. other companies can link to this global currency record. tax amounts.59 (1 SGD = 129.Select this check box to indicate the currency can be used to display amounts on invoices. this check box activates the exchange rate fields for this currency within Exchange Rate Entry.0. but any previous records that use this currency are maintained by the application. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Target Currency: JPY • Actual Rate: 0.700 143 . You can have between 0-5 decimals for Cost and Price amounts and 0-3 decimals for General amounts like extended prices. Note however. Select this check box if you want to make this currency available across your entire organization. • Maintain Rate-. and other records. Selected by default. however.007716 • Inverse Conversion: SGD Amount = JPY Amount * 129. Logic/Algorithms The currency master functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.007716 (1 JPY = 0. sales orders. • Global Currency-. • Inactive-.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Currency Symbol-. 007716 (1JPY = 0. the Main Menu appears as: • Customer Relationship Management > Sales and Marketing Management > Setup > Customer • Customer Relationship Management > EDI > Setup > Customer • Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Customer • Customer Relationship Management > Quote Management > Setup > Customer 144 Epicor ERP | 10.59 Customer Maintenance Use Customer Maintenance to enter customer records. sales orders. New customers are automatically placed on credit hold.7716 (100JPY = 0. Customer records are crucial for capturing opportunities. To set up a customer that has two or more divisions within a large company.2959 (1SGD = 129. Customer records are primarily used to create quotes. use the Parent/Child functionality. This allows you to create customer records for companies that may do business with you in the future.0.59 JPY) • Actual Rate: 0. Divisions are separate customers that link to the main parent company. parts. You can designate a customer as a Suspect. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Customer • Financial Management > Deferred Revenue Accounting > Setup > Customer • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Customer • Production Management > Material Requirements Planning > Setup > Customer • Sales Management > Customer Relationship Management > Setup > Customer • Sales Management > EDI > Setup > Customer • Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Customer • Sales Management > Quote Management > Setup > Customer • Service Management > Field Service > Setup > Customer For CRM users.700 . You can also specify a customer’s approved suppliers for materials. Customers are businesses to whom you sell products and services. and subcontract operations.007716 • Inverted Conversion: SGD Amount=JPY Amount * 129.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0. and accounts receivable (AR) invoices. and generating accounts receivable invoices. You also use customer records during the Customer Relationship Management (CRM) process. creating sales orders.59 (1SGD = 129. You must clear the Credit Hold check box on the Billing > Credit> Credit Detail sheet to display transactions for this customer. or Customer.007716) • Actual Rate: 129.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Target Scale Factor: 100 • Display Rate: 0.7716 SGD) • Display Rate: 1. Prospect. Epicor ERP | 10.Select the customer identifier for the external company. Items you modify: • Customer ID -. When selected.Indicates this customer's transactions can be moved between another company defined as an inter-company trading partner. the Epicor application automatically copies any updates made to this global customer record to any records linked to it in a child company. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. the IC Trader indicator is highlighted. • Terms -. This indicates the external company can sell items to the current company. If the IC Trader check box is selected. • Partner Customer ID -.Select the supplier identifier for the current company. You also use this program to create records for companies who will be intercompany trading partners. This indicates the external company can purchase items from the current company. you cannot select the Global check box.Indicates that this global customer record cannot be updated through changes made by the parent company. This indicates the current company can purchase items from the external company. Items you modify: • Global -.Use this drop-down list to define the default selling terms used with this customer record. You define these partnerships on the Detail > Company Information sheet. the Global indicator is highlighted. This indicates the current company can sell items to the external company.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the customer functionality in the following programs. • Partner Supplier ID -. • Supplier ID -. • Global Lock -. Customer Maintenance You use Customer Maintenance to both create global records within parent companies and then pull in these global customer records within child companies. If the current customer is an inter-company trader.Select the customer identifier for the current company. When selected. • You cannot select this check box if the Global check box is selected.Select the supplier identifier for the external company.0. External Company Configuration Launch this program to create inter-company trading partnerships. you select a selling terms record which is identical to the purchasing terms record selected on the supplier trading partner. When selected.700 145 . • IC Trader -.Specifies if this customer record is available for use in other companies. BROWN • Partner Customer ID -.BROWN • Partner Supplier ID -. You navigate to the Brown company. Child companies can then launch Customer Maintenance and pull in this record through the Link Customer functionality.BROWN (current company) • Customer ID -. You can then select this customer record within External Company Maintenance in the Inter-Company Trading section.0. You now launch External Company Maintenance. You then launch Customer Maintenance and enter both companies. however. While in External Company Maintenance. clicking on each drop-down list: • Supplier ID -. enter these companies as suppliers.BROWN (current company) After you save this record. and indicate these records are IC Traders. you select the following records: • Supplier ID -.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Logic/Algorithms The customer functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. you define the trading partnership within the Inter-Company Trading section. Global Customers When the Global check box is selected. Inter-Company Trading Example You are setting up an inter-company trading relationship between two companies. Brown and Blue. After you select Multi-Company as your External System. this record is passed to other companies via the multi-company server process. You then define the following options. within your organization. 146 Epicor ERP | 10. You first create Net 30 purchasing and selling terms. you indicate this customer record can be used to process inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs). Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the customer functionality.BLUE (current company) Now these two companies can create inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs) and buy/sell parts and services from each other.BLUE • Partner Customer ID -.BLUE (current company) • Customer ID -. You select the Enable check box to activate this functionality. you navigate to the Blue company and do the same thing. Inter-Company Trading When the IC Trader check box is selected.BLUE • Partner Supplier ID -. indicating these records are IC Traders. Likewise you launch Supplier Maintenance.700 . making sure both terms records are identical. The available fiscal period choices are based on the company calendar you set up from the Company Configuration program. • Fiscal Period . you need to be able to prevent posting to a period after the ending date passes (for example. add a New Type to Earliest Apply Date Maintenance for the Accounts Payable module. Period 5 . Earliest Apply Date Entry Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > General Operations > Earliest Apply Date Available modifiers: • Define By -. to accurately track Accounts Payable transactions. enter a new earliest apply date type and define the date or period to resume posting. This prevents any Accounts Payable GL transactions from posting prior to the actual/current period. Tip Use Earliest Apply Date Entry separately or in conjunction with the Close Period Entry process.Indicates how you wish to select the earliest apply date.0. This prevents errors from displaying when you enter or import financial data into your new company. Set up specific earliest apply dates for any of the following modules: • Cash Management • Accounts Receivable • Accounts Payable • Inventory and Production • Asset Management • Payroll If at any time you need to prevent posting to an open period for a specific module.Activates the Earliest Apply Date field. The Close Period Entry process closes periods specific to a book. You can select or enter any specific calendar date. When you first set up a new company. ensure the Earliest Apply Date value is on a date or in a period prior to the date you will load financial data into the Epicor application. Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the Earliest Apply Date functionality in the following program.700 147 . and define June 1 of the current year as its Earliest Apply Date. In this example. Epicor ERP | 10.May 31). The Earliest Apply Date set on the Detail sheet is the first date on which you can apply any financial transaction in a company. When you define an Earliest Apply Date for a specific module. However. Options: • Date . Example Your company does not typically close periods on the actual closing date because extra time is often needed to account for adjustments.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Earliest Apply Date Entry Use Earliest Apply Date Entry to prevent business transaction types from posting in open fiscal periods.Activates the Fiscal Year/Period search button. You can define a date to resume posting transactions on a module by module basis or companywide. this date applies to all transaction types for that module. Exchange Rate Entry Available modifiers: • Effective Date-. You enter exchange rates by creating an exchange rate record. 148 Epicor ERP | 10.Defines the date on which the exchange rates begin. each of which consist of an original. You are implementing the Accounts Payable module within the Athens company. You use Earliest Apply Date Entry to define that transactions can post to the general ledger from this module on May 15th of the current year. The rate type also defines the conversion rule such as Direct.700 . Each exchange rate indicates how many units of the target currency are needed to buy one unit of the source currency. The rate type first defines the currency pairs. You can also import the rates from an external file generated by Epicor Service Connect. You next define the Effective Date for the exchange rates. and companies throughout your organization. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Earliest Apply Date functionality. All transactions post either on or after the Earliest Apply Date defined for the specific module. This import program is located under the Actions menu. the application uses this exchange rate to convert this value into equivalent values as this transaction is tracked on various records. sites. You first select the rate type that will handle the exchange rates. or target currency. You can enter the exchange rates for each currency pair directly through this program. Exchange Rate Entry Use Exchange Rate Entry to define specific exchange rates for each currency pair. • Rate Value-.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Logic/Algorithms The Earliest Apply Date functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. or source currency and a receiving. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Currency Management > General Operations > Exchange Rate Entry Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the exchange rate functionality in the following program. Cross-Rate.0.Indicates the Rate Type against which these exchange rates apply. You create rate types within Rate Type Maintenance. • Rate Type-. The Epicor application uses these rates to calculate converted amounts on international transactions. books. When you enter a business transaction in one currency. The application uses these starting from this date until the application clock reaches the Effective Date on the next exchange rate record. An exchange rate converts the value of one currency into an equivalent value in another currency.Defines the specific exchange rate value you need for each currency pair. Double Cross-Rate used on each currency pair. 7716 SGD) • Display Rate: 1.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Logic/Algorithms The exchange rate functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.007716 • Inverse Conversion: SGD Amount = JPY Amount * 129.0.59 (1 SGD = 129.59 If you use scale factors.007716) • Actual Rate: 129.007716 SGD • Actual Rate: 129.59 Epicor ERP | 10.59 JPY) • Actual Rate: 0. If you do not use a scale factor.007716 • Inverted Conversion: SGD Amount=JPY Amount * 129.007716 (1 JPY = 0. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Source Scale Factor: 1 • Target Currency: JPY • Target Scale Factor: 100 • Display Rate: 0.2959 (1SGD = 129.007716 (1JPY = 0. • Direct Conversion = Source Currency Amount x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Inverse Conversion = Source Currency Amount/Target Currency Exchange Rate • Cross Rate Conversion = (Source Currency Amount x Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Alternate Cross-Rate Conversion = (Source Currency Amount x Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Double Cross-Rate Conversion = ((Source Currency Amount x Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Reverse Double Cross-Rate Conversion = ((Source Currency Amount/Interim Currency Exchange Rate)/Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate)/Target Currency Exchange Rate Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the exchange rate functionality.700 149 . however.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0.59 (1SGD = 129. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Target Currency: JPY • Actual Rate: 0.7716 (100JPY = 0.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0. You are converting a transaction from Singapore Dollars (SGD) to Japanese Yen (JPY). Fiscal years in one fiscal calendar cannot overlap and there cannot be gaps between years. Fiscal Calendar Maintenance supports multiple calendars with one calendar defined as the company calendar. 150 Epicor ERP | 10. • Assign a fiscal calendar to a book. A Fiscal Calendar defines years and fiscal periods required to report on financial activity. A fiscal calendar defines a company's calendar in relation to financial reporting. Only one calendar can be assigned to each book. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Fiscal Calendar • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Fiscal Calendar • Financial Management > Asset Management > Setup > Fiscal Calendar • Financial Management > Deferred Revenue Accounting > Setup > Fiscal Calendar • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Fiscal Calendar • Financial Management > Payroll > Setup > Fiscal Calendar Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the Fiscal Calendars functionality from the Main Menu. Tip Do not confuse fiscal calendars with production calendars. Fiscal Calendar Maintenance Use Fiscal Calendar Maintenance to determine the periods during which journals post. Use this text field to help explain the purpose of the fiscal calendar. and lengths.0. number of periods. Once you create a fiscal year. A Production Calendar defines the day-to-day schedule needed to produce and deliver products through manufacturing centers. Launch this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Fiscal Calendar Modifiers you define in this program: • Description-.Displays the concise explanation for the fiscal calendar. Example A business wants to have a calendar that represents their fiscal year according to their operations st th which run from October 1 through September 30 . You can perform the following procedures that relate to fiscal calendars: • Assign a fiscal calendar as the default company calendar.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Fiscal Calendar Maintenance Use Fiscal Calendar Maintenance to set up fiscal calendars. use the Generate Periods command to generate its fiscal periods. • Assign a fiscal calendar to the Asset Management module. The fiscal calendar contains a sequence of fiscal years. It also describes the values you can change for this item. while they must calculate their taxes based on a calendar year.700 . Calendars can have flexible start dates. Effective dates allow the COA to reflect changes in the company's structure or business. General Ledger Account Maintenance General Ledger Account Maintenance defines valid general ledger (GL) accounts for a chart of accounts (COA). • Whether to use the account for inter-company processing. You cannot include dynamic segments in GL accounts. • Start Date-. • The available values in fields used for GL account entry .For example. General ledger accounts contain the natural account segment and other controlled segments. A business may want to have a calendar that represents their fiscal year according to their operations which runs from October 1st through September 30th. • The effective dates for accounts . Inter-company processing updates multi-company accounts defined in the COAs of a parent company and its subsidiaries. Set the To Date field to the year's end when you define the account.0. This program determines: • Valid entries for the selected COA . • Whether to preserve the account's description and active status during automatic account updates.Indicates the first date on which the fiscal calendar is active. Use of a COA blocks the addition of controlled segments. an account designates a product line discontinued at the end of the year. As a result. EachThe book must have one fiscal calendar selected for it.Indicates the last date on which the fiscal calendar is active. As a result. Definition of a single GL account constitutes use of the COA. Account Segment Values defines values used to generate accounts through GL Account Maintenance. Tip Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance designates a segment as dynamic or controlled. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Fiscal Calendars functionality. Epicor ERP | 10.700 151 . while their taxes may need to be calculated based on a calendar year. Use of a segment value blocks changes to the value in Account Segment Values.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • End Date-. For example. Posting rules set the value of most dynamic segments. an error occurs if a journal that uses the account posts to the COA after the end of the year. Logic/Algorithms The Fiscal Calendars functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. the Master COA must define all accounts needed to post from these fields.The Epicor application validates GL transactions that post to the COA against the accounts defined in this program. the Epicor application limits entries in the GL Account field to Master COA accounts in AP Adjustment Entry. Define the segments and enter the settings that display in the following table. Launch this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account 152 Epicor ERP | 10.700 . It also describes the values you can change for this item. Segment COA Settings Valid Values 1 Segment type: Controlled 1000.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Example The following example (based on the Master COA) illustrates how segment properties affect GL account codes. Addison (Segment values created for these Customer IDs) Entry control: Optional Designate 1000-10 and 2000-20 as valid GL accounts in General Ledger Account Maintenance. Account Code Valid or invalid? 1000-10 and 2000-20 Valid combination of defined segment values 1000-20 and 2000-10 Invalid combination of defined segment values 1000-10-Dalton Valid combination of defined segment values and customer ID 2000-10-Dalton Invalid combination of defined segment values and customer ID 1000-__-Dalton Valid combination of a defined segment value and customer ID as the second segment is optional Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > General Ledger Account Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the General Ledger Accounts functionality from the Main Menu. General Ledger Account Maintenance Use General Ledger Account Maintenance to define valid general ledger accounts for a selected COA. 20 (Segment values defined in Account Segment Values for these Departments) Dalton.0. 2000. 3000 (Segment values defined in Account Segment Values) Entry control: Natural Account 2 Segment type: Controlled Entry control: Optional 3 Segment type: Dynamic 10. The following table shows how the Epicor application validates journal account codes when they post to the GL. Defines the text used for the GL account. this value includes the name of the natural account and the abbreviated descriptions of the other segments.This date range defines the time period during which this GL account can be used for posting. 3000 (Segment values defined in the Account Segment Values program) Entry control: Natural Account Epicor ERP | 10.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Modifiers you define in this program: • Active-. During this process. division.0. If the To Date field is blank.Indicates whether this GL account is currently used by the Epicor application. The From Date defines the first day on which this GL account can be used. To search for an existing GL account. click the drop-down list and select the chart. • Effective From Date and Effective To Date-. all multi-company accounts update within the book COAs of a parent company and its subsidiaries. General ledger accounts define the accounts used for posting to the general ledger.700 153 .Use this drop-down list to select the COA for which you want to create general ledger accounts. the current GL account can be used for posting indefinitely (or end when its Active check box is clear). • Preserve Activation-.Indicates whether the Description text cannot be deleted during automatic account updates. the current GL account is included in this process. click the GL Account button to find and select it.Indicates whether the current GL account should remain active during automatic account updates. Segment Properties Example The following example illustrates how segment properties affect general ledger account codes. To create a new account. • Preserve Description-. These updates occur while accounts are generated within Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance. Logic/Algorithms The General Ledger Accounts functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. By default. These updates occur while accounts generate within Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance. • Chart of Accounts-. • Multi-Company -. When you create the account. • Description-. Effective Dates Example An account is defined to record financial transactions for a product line. If you select this check box. You define the segments and enter the settings shown in the following table. Enter the text you need in this field. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the General Ledger Accounts functionality. 2000.Use this field to either create a new GL account or select an existing GL account. • GL Account-. an error occurs if a journal that uses the account is posted to the COA after the end of the year. and department options as you need.Indicates whether this account is used for inter-company processing. This value prints on reports and displays in programs which use this account. This product line will be discontinued at the end of the year. Segment COA Settings Valid Values 1 Segment type: Controlled 1000. you set the To Date field to the last day of the year. As a result. 1000-20 Invalid combination of defined segment values. Tip You can define a different set of reference types and masks for each COA. define a reference type to classify businesses as corporations or sole proprietorships because this information is unavailable from customer or supplier records. the Epicor application uses the type with the mask that most closely matches the account for the transaction. 1000-10-Dalton Valid combination of defined segment values and customer ID. You can associate a single reference-type segment with multiple reference types and associate a single reference type with multiple masks. For example.0. Because reference-type segments are set manually. Addison (Segment values created for these Customer IDs) You designate 1000-10 and 2000-20 as valid general ledger accounts in General Ledger Account Maintenance. but use of a standard set of types across all charts of accounts permits a broader analysis of company data. two types can have masks that match the same account. In some cases. Account Segment Values define the segment value associated with your selection. You do not need to define values for this segment in the GL controls or through the use of posting rules. 20 (Segment values defined in the Account Segment Values program for these Departments) Dalton. Reference type values classify campaigns. The second segment is optional. The following table shows how the application validates journal account codes when posted to the general ledger. 154 Epicor ERP | 10. a type that includes a mask for account 2300-10-00 takes priority over a type with a mask of 2300-1_-00. Account Code Valid or invalid? 1000-10 Valid combination of defined segment values.700 .Primary Components 2 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Segment type: Controlled Entry control: Optional 3 Segment type: Dynamic Entry control: Optional 10. For example. When you create a reference-type segment in Chart of Accounts Maintenance. 1000-Dalton Valid combination of a defined segment value and customer ID. and other items with a fixed life for use in financial reporting. projects. you can then define types and masks for the segment. Account masks determine the GL accounts that include the reference-type segment and whether including this segment is required or optional. GL COA Reference Type Use GL COA Reference Type Maintenance to define reference types and reference type masks placed against a chart of accounts (COA) segment. In this case. General ledger (GL) account and chart trackers display the information reference types generate. You determine the value of a reference-type segment when a transaction posts. leverage them to classify items that cannot be set by values in posted journals. This mask includes the natural account segment used for employee vouchers with the division and department segments masked.Indicates the segment must be included in general ledger accounts. GL COA Reference Type Maintenance You create GL COA Reference Types within this program. Air Fare. You can associate a reference-type segment with multiple types. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Account Segment Values To define a reference type for a segment: • Reference Type -. Define mask 2300-__-__. In Chart of Accounts Maintenance.General ledger accounts which do not have this segment may still post amounts to the general ledger. You define natural account values within Account Segment Values Maintenance. • Description -. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL COA Reference Type Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the GL COA reference type functionality in the following programs. Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance You define which account masks are used with a reference type segment within Chart of Accounts Structure Maintenance. • Optional .Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example Create a reference type to classify travel expenses employees incur. or Per Diem when you post. Menu Path: Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Chart of Accounts You use select reference account masks as part of Entry Control: • Mandatory .700 155 .Text which defines the type on financial maintenance programs and reports. In GL COA Reference Type. select the segment mask and define segment values for the options Lodging. you must designate your expenses as Lodging. Since the mask is required. select the COA and segment. define a reference-type segment for the Master COA. In Account Segment Values.Use this drop-down list to select a reference type you created in GL COA Reference Type Maintenance. Account Segment Values Maintenance You select an account segment's reference type within this program. Epicor ERP | 10.Designates the segment is either optional or mandatory for each natural account value. • Natural Account . Air Fare. Items to modify: • Type -. Designate the mask status as required.Groups the type's account masks in this program and the type's values in the Account Segment Values program. and create a Travel reference type. and Per Diem.0. • The posting rules for the GL transaction type use the GL controls' account references to create the accounts for the company journals. Each GL control type is linked to a specific business entity. The association allows the use of control values when the record applies to a posted transaction. GL control types are templates used by the third and final level of this hierarchy -. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the GL COA reference type functionality. 156 Epicor ERP | 10. All the posting accounts the Epicor application uses for each business transaction are defined through GL Control Maintenance. You can associate one or more GL controls with a record in a setup (maintenance) program. GL Control Maintenance General ledger control codes define the accounts and journal codes available during the posting process for a specific transaction. You define a reference type mask for this campaign. The posting rules access account values through the references to the account contexts defined on the linked GL control types. they are the database tables/fields which hold the data needed for the posting process. Business entities are at the top of this hierarchy. The posting rules then use posted transaction data to define these segment values. The GL control then uses these templates to determine the specific account string and journal code to use with a business transaction. link a GL control to a GL control type. Example • You add a Landed Cost account context to the AP Account GL control type.Indicates the segment is optional or mandatory for an account mask defined in GL COA Reference Type. Each control associated with a record must belong to a different GL control type.0. • You post a transaction that belongs to Company A. You can only select this option on reference-type segments. You want to track the marketing campaign expenses for your BlueBox product.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Reference Account Mask . Example The AR Account and AP Account control types reference the Company business entity. • You define GL controls based on both types and apply them to Company A in Company Configuration. and so the business entity defines what areas of the database the GL control type updates through its account and journal contexts. GL control accounts lack values for one or more segments. each GL control uses the account and journal contexts from the control type as a template. When you associate a reference type with a chart of accounts (COA) segment. The items directly below business entities in the hierarchy are GL control types. A GL control uses the account contexts specified through the GL control type to define the specific accounts which update for each transaction. you can select a segment value for a posted transaction. Often.GL controls. GL controls are used in the posting hierarchy. You can create and modify GL controls to extend the posting functionality. First.700 . the posting rules defined in GL Transaction Type Maintenance use GL controls to create transaction details. During posting. Logic/Algorithms The GL COA reference type functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. You then select this mask on the account segment you wish to reference. Verify the posting processes which use the GL control create valid accounts after the changes. • You now apply this GL control to a company record (Company Configuration). A transaction for Company A posts to the general ledger. You cannot associate GL controls with programs where users select posting accounts when they enter transactions. it can cause invalid journals to generate. • You can now enter a GL account in the Landed Cost account context in the GL control. Examples of this type of program include AP Adjustment Entry and Cash Receipt Entry. Ensure the new account contexts are appropriate for the business entities against which the type applies. You can link as many accounts as you need to the GL control. You then select them as GL controls for the Company A record within Company Configuration . The posting rules use the account Epicor ERP | 10. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the GL Controls functionality. As a result.0.Use this drop-down list to define the GL control type to which you need to assign the current GL control. Posting process rules use this reference to define journal accounts. GL Control Maintenance Use GL Control Maintenance to create and modify GL controls. you can track and report on journals by the generated journal code. To launch this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Code Modifiers you define in this program: • Account-. The Master Chart of Accounts (COA) defines the accounts available to users of these programs. • Type-.Specifies an account referenced by the posting processes to which the control applies. GL controls determine the account strings and journal codes used to record financial transactions for a specific record. You then assign these controls to specific records within maintenance programs. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Code Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the GL Controls functionality from the Main Menu. Logic/Algorithms The GL Controls functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. applicable transactions the posting process creates are recorded in associated journals. The AR Account and AP Account control types reference the Company business entity. It also describes the values you can change for this item. You define GL controls which use both types.700 157 .Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • You then create a GL control under the AP Account GL control type. Important If you modify or delete GL control codes. When journal codes are linked with GL controls. GL Control Type Maintenance Use GL Control Type Maintenance to create and modify GL control types to reflect the account contexts. Product Group. Project. You can view and modify posting rules within GL Transaction Type Maintenance. Each GL control type links to a specific business entity. GL control types define: • Account contexts .The journal contexts associate journal codes with the GL controls linked to the GL control type. • Business Entities . and so the business entity defines what areas of the database the GL control type updates through its account and journal contexts. To launch this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Type 158 Epicor ERP | 10. You can modify GL control types to extend the posting functionality.The business entities defined on the GL control type indicate against which database tables the GL control type is used. Supplier. GL Control Type Maintenance General ledger (GL) control types group together account contexts. journal contexts. The items directly below business entities in the hierarchy are GL control types. and so on. and business entities used to define the accounts generated through GL controls. and are at the top of the hierarchy which generates accounts during the posting process. • Journal contexts .GL controls linked to the GL control type use its account contexts to specify the books and accounts to which GL transactions post. It also describes the values you can change for this item. and business entities you need for all GL controls. Ensure the new account and journal contexts are appropriate for the business entities selected on the GL control type.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide strings selected on the GL controls to record both the AP and AR transactions and generate the appropriate journal codes. GL control types are the templates the third and final level of this hierarchy (GL controls) use. You can create a GL control type to support a new accounting process or to integrate the Epicor application with another financial application. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Control Type Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the GL Control Types functionality from the Main Menu. Journal codes group journals created through the posting process which apply to the business transaction.These default values limit how an account maps to a book or requires you use a specific account with all GL controls linked to the GL control type. journal contexts. The posting rules specified within the GL transaction type use this account information to define each GL detail. Use GL Control Type Maintenance to create and edit the GL control types you use with the current company.0. These predefined GL control types correspond to the programs that maintain GL controls that apply to posted transactions. The Epicor application comes with a set of predefined GL control types. A GL control uses the account contexts specified through the GL control type to define the specific accounts which update for each transaction. • Account entry defaults for GL controls . Part. Business entities define items such as Customer.700 . Optionally. Epicor ERP | 10. pre-posting rules. Enter the context you need in this field. you can only use this account context for accounts defined as part of the Master COA. • Journal-. • Business Entity-. Logic/Algorithms The GL Controls functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.Describes the purpose for the account context. bank fee.specific to its posting process. It also contains a set of rules each book uses. use this drop-down list to select a specific book. use this drop-down list to define the journal to which the GL control type uses. When you select this check box.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Modifiers you define in this program: • All Books-. All the journal codes available within your application display on this list. You then select them as GL controls for the Company A record within Company Configuration . each rule set can contain the functions. for example. If you select this check box. functions. • Required-. These elements contain data the posting rules need to build account and journal details.A Journal Context modifier. The posting rules use the account strings selected on the GL controls to record both the AP and AR transactions and generate the appropriate journal codes.Indicates whether an account must be defined for this account context.700 159 . • User Master Chart-. If you select this check box. Each GL transaction type has a set of elements posting codes. • Context-. GL controls determine the account strings and journal codes used to record financial transactions for a specific record. GL Transaction Type Maintenance GL Transaction Type Maintenance defines the processes you use to post accounts and journals.An Entity modifier. All the available business entities display on this list. The AR Account and AP Account control types reference the Company business entity. reference rules.0. This account context can then only be mapped within the selected book. The posting process provides a unified series of rules which are applied against specific business transactions. A transaction for Company A posts to the general ledger. the Master COA displays in the accompanying field.Indicates whether the account context can map to multiple books. and amounts . improving the performance of the conversion program when a new service pack is released. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the GL Controls functionality. Each posting process uses one or more GL transaction types. You define GL controls which use both types. Important The Virtual Business Document (VBD) and Posting Rules are upgraded only if there is an actual change. Refer to the Transaction Type Conversion application help topic for detailed information on how the conversion program updates GL transaction types during an upgrade to a new service pack or a new version of the product. you create these codes within Journal Code Maintenance. and posting rules needed to post business transactions which match the GL transaction type. you must define the account for GL codes which use this GL control type. use this drop-down list to define the business entity for which the GL control type uses. • Book-.Indicates whether the current account context requires a master COA. These rules are flexible and can be modified to meet the needs of a specific book. functions. or you can define a revision to integrate your Epicor application with other applications. GL Transaction Type Maintenance Use GL Transaction Type Maintenance to create and update the posting rules for transaction types. reference rules. You should also first run your modified rules on a test server so that you avoid the risk of posting invalid journals to the general ledger. use the help Table of Contents and navigate to the General Ledger > Working With section. the account to which the detail posts. posting rules.700 . You can set up the posting rules in one book and then use these same rules in another book. add a new revision to an existing transaction type. To launch this program from the Main Menu: Menu Path: Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Transaction Type 160 Epicor ERP | 10. business activity queries. Posting rules can create a single detail or a pair of balancing details. As you post invoices. the rules create a GL control used to store account contexts for later processing. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > GL Transaction Type Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Note that you cannot create a new transaction type. For example. The general ledger control used by the posting process defines the accounts that posting rules use. a large number of detail records can generate within the database. amounts. It is available in the application help. fiscal calendar. This applies the posting codes. The rule obtains the warehouse ID for the inventory sold and sets the value of a dynamic segment based on the ID. Instead. In some cases.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Use this program to do the following: • Define the active revision you need to post transactions. and other elements used to post transactions for this type.0. • Define the posting codes. It also describes the values you can change for this item. Example You define a rule for a journal which generates when a sales order posts. you can define a transaction type revision so it matches a business process within the current company. Posting codes determine the attributes you use with the accounts and journals. Display results in the Review Journal to ensure new and modified posting rules create valid transactions. Use summary journals to reduce how many financial transactions save to general ledger tables. review the Posting Engine Technical Reference Guide. Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the GL Transaction Type functionality from the Main Menu. You can assign revisions to different books. • Define the rules used to post transactions. Pre-posting rules define the defaults used when you manually enter general ledger accounts. For more information on how to create and edit posting rules. Important If you modify or delete posting rules. Each book has settings that also affect the posting process. and other transactions. These rules determine the detail line amount. it can cause the Epicor application to generate invalid journals. pre-posting rules. This guide also contains a reference section which documents the extended set of posting rules. vouchers. and currency the book uses. • Summarize the journals posted to a book by transaction type. These settings include the chart of accounts. amounts. and other items defined within the revision. and whether the detail amount debits or credits the account. You define a rule for a journal generated when an AR invoice posts. For example. Logic/Algorithms The GL Transaction Type functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.These codes can group journals used to Consolidate to Parent and Import Consolidation from Subsidiary. GL transaction types contain the posting rules logic for a specific business activity within your database. You can create a journal code to group: • Month-end journals • Consolidation journals . Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the GL Transaction Type functionality. Example The pre-defined journal code SJ (Sales Journal) is meant to apply to journals used to post Accounts Receivable (AR) invoices. You cannot activate other revisions while you are in this mode. You can then track and report on journals by code. consolidation definitions apply the codes to journals posted from source books to intermediate and target books. • Financial Management/General Ledger/Setup/GL Transaction Type Maintenance Modifiers you define in this program: • Always a single Active Revision-. you can then use the Review Journal to verify you are generating the results you want. The application allows the use of the groups to validate and track consolidation journals. Activate this mode after you have modified or created a transaction type.Select this radio option to indicate that only one active revision can be used with this transaction type at a time. The rule pulls in the warehouse ID for the inventory amount which was sold. • Select an Active Revision by Date-. The application uses the Apply Date value on a journal to calculate which active transaction type to use.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.Defines the specific transaction type you are creating or modifying.Displays the purpose of the transaction type.700 161 .0. This mechanism allows reports and trackers to group sales transactions by the code. System journal codes can apply to journals through association of a posting process with a GL control. • Manually review all transactions-.Select this radio option to indicate you can use different active revisions for the current transaction type.Indicates that all of the GL transactions generated by the current transaction type will display within the Review Journal. Posting AP Logged Invoice. this value is puled from the sales order linked to AR invoice. • Detailed Description-. Epicor ERP | 10. The application applies the code to journals posted from the program. Some posting processes use default codes when a GL control does not supply a journal code. The posting rule sets the value of a dynamic segment based on the warehouse ID. Journal Code Maintenance Journal Code Maintenance defines codes used to group journals associated with posting processes. In addition. • Transaction Type-. The code SJ is associated with the GL control used to post journals from AR Invoice Entry. The application includes the predefined journal codes in the following table: Code Description Process AJ Adjustments Journal Adjustment entry in AP or AR AMJ Asset Management Journal Asset posting process in Asset Management CD Cash Disbursements Journal Check entry in AP CR Cash Receipts Journal Cash receipt entry in AR GJ General Journal Manual journals entered in Journal Entry IJ Inventory Journal Capture COS/WIP Activity in Job Management PJ Purchase Journal Invoice entry in AP PR Payroll Journal Payroll check entry in Payroll SJ Sales Journal Invoice entry in AR Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Journal Code Program Location and Modifiers The following section details the location(s) where you can access the Journal Codes functionality from the Main Menu. When you use a journal code with a GL control.Indicates the purpose for the journal code.700 . To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management/General Ledger/Setup/Journal Code Maintenance Modifiers you define in this program: • Description-. Logic/Algorithms The Journal Codes functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.0.Defines the code you use to identify this journal. Creation of a company results in generation of a set of pre-defined codes. This text value displays on various reports and programs. • Journal Code-. It also describes the values you can change for this item. 162 Epicor ERP | 10. • System Journal-. Creation of an ACT type is a significant customization of the application.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Transactions created by new accounting transaction types (ACT types) defined in GL Transaction Type Maintenance. Journal Code Maintenance Use GL Transaction Type Maintenance to create and update the posting rules for GL transaction types. it applies the journal code to all the journals created through the GL control.Select this check box to indicate that this code is applied to default journals generated by the application. Journal codes determine the journal contexts on GL control types. Your Epicor application includes pre-defined journal codes for posting processes run from application programs. including Minimum. Also. and weight values.0. define these parameters as well. purchases. which includes unit of measure (UOM) options for sales. Each part record contains crucial data you may need for purchase or production needs. the Main Menu appears as: • Customer Relationship Management > Configurator Management > Setup > Part • Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > Setup > Part Epicor ERP | 10. purchased or manufactured parts on a bill of material must have a record set up in Part Maintenance. and search criteria. Maximum. The code SJ is linked to the GL control which posts journals from AR Invoice Entry. Reports and trackers then group sales transactions by the SJ (Sales Journal) code. as each record requires little data and can save you data entry time later. description. inventory. but it is recommended that you enter parts in this program. a part record defines inventory information.Item • Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Part • Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > Setup > Part • Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Part • Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Setup > Part • Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Part • Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Part • Production Management > Material Requirements Planning > Setup > Part • Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Part • Sales Management > Configurator Management > Setup > Part • Sales Management > Demand Management > Setup > Part • Sales Management > Order Management > Setup > Part • Service Management > Field Service > Setup > Part For CRM users. non-stock classifications. You can also select parts as materials on quote. The pre-defined journal code SJ (Sales Journal) applies to journals that post AR invoices.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Journal Codes functionality. you can access it from each site within the company. Tip Most modules do not require parts to exist in Part Maintenance.700 163 . and Safety Stock quantities. A part record contains general information such as part number. If you use the Engineering module. When you set up a part. Part Maintenance Use Part Maintenance to enter or update part information. and use it on jobs. serial number tracking. The application applies the code to journals posted from the AR Invoice Entry program. You also define warehouse and bin information for each part. job. If this part is included in a sales kit. or part methods of manufacturing. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • > Gift Card . Parts are either purchased items you use for raw materials or subassemblies or manufactured items you use to fill sales orders. Specifies if this partrecord is available for use in other companies.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the part functionality in the following program. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the part functionality with multi-company processes. When a parent company creates a purchase order for this part. child companies can receive part quantities from this global PO. Consolidated Purchasing When the Consolidated Purchasing check box is selected. After you save the record. When selected. items you modify: • Global -. You define these values on the Part>Detail sheet. • Consolidated Purchasing -. a part you purchase. You create a record for XUY-764. the Epicor application automatically copies any updates made to this global part record to any records linked to it in a child company.Indicates that this global part record cannot be updated through changes made by the parent company. When selected. it indicates the part can be used on a consolidated purchase order. child companies can receive part quantities from this global PO. When a parent company creates a purchase order for this part. so you select the Global check box. 164 Epicor ERP | 10.700 . Child companies can then launch Customer Maintenance and pull in this record through the Link Customer functionality. the Global indicator is highlighted. • Global Lock -. users in child companies within your organization can link to this record. You also indicate whether is part can be used for consolidated purchasing.0. Now any changes you make to the XUY-764 global part record automatically populate the linked records within the child companies. Global Customers When the Global check box is selected. Part Maintenance You indicate specific parts are global records within this program.Indicates the part can be used on a consolidated purchase order. You are in the parent company. this record is passed to other companies using the multi-company server process. Logic/Algorithms The part functionality uses this multi-company logic. For example. these changes automatically update the linked rate type records within the child companies. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Currency Management > Setup > Rate Type Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the rate type functionality in the following program. Depending on your company needs. You activate these global rate types within each company using External Company Maintenance. use this program to then define the conversion rule which applies to the currency pair. or source currency and a resulting. Epicor ERP | 10. the Cross-Rate Currency and Alternative Cross-Rate Currency values define additional. Rate Type Maintenance Use Rate Type Maintenance to apply conversion rules to currency pairs. select the Round check box.700 165 . You next define how each currency pair is converted using this rate type. you may need to create different rate types for different business purposes. If your organization requires a multi-company environment. or target currency. Each pair consists of a source currency that indicates the original currency used in the transaction. For example. Each rate type is used to accurately convert currencies to reflect business activity needs. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management/Currency Management/Setup/Rate Type Modifiers you define in this program: • Alternative Cross Rate Currency-. define them as global records. and then have child companies link to these records. Each target and source currency pair must have a conversion rule selected that defines the method used to calculate the converted amounts between the two currencies. you can create parent rate types in one company. You can have multiple rate types available to reflect different business needs. you also need another rate type that defines conversions that use daily buy and sell rates. Each currency you add through Currency Maintenance is automatically paired with another currency. A currency pair consists of an original. You can also indicate that a specific rate type is a global record.Use this section to define the interim currency for the Alternate Cross-Rate conversion rule or the Secondary Interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Rate Type Maintenance Use Rate Type Maintenance to create and update currency rate types your company uses. If changes are made to the parent rate type. This relationship displays in Rate Type Maintenance as undefined. If you can round values for the Alternative Cross Rate Currency. and a target currency that indicates the currency used for the final amount. you need one rate type to convert the official rates required on invoices. Each rate type is a collection of overall default rate values and conversion rules. but for management purposes. You first define the overall rate values for the group. This ensures you use consistent currency conversion rules throughout your organization. Interim currencies used by specific conversion rules in the group. Rate types define the conversion rules the Epicor application applies against all possible source and target currency pairs available within your company. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field.0. 0. currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies.Detail sheet become inactive. If you can round values for the Cross Rate Currency. • Cross Rate Currency-. and the Effective Rate cannot be updated by this conversion rule.Users an alternate Interim currency to convert amounts between the source and target currencies. If you select this check box.Multiples an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency. the rate is locked. any changes to the global rate type are not passed along to any child companies linked to this rate type. Global Rate Types Global Rate Type Options: • When a rate type is defined as a global record. or Interim. • Global-.Determines how many decimals calculate and display for amounts converted through the current rate type. This conversion rule runs the Inverse calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency. You can then indicate up to how many decimals can be used to round within the Decimals field. You can enter between 0-6 decimal places in this field. • Decimals-.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Conversion Rule-.Indicates whether this rate type can be used by other companies within your organization. • Cross-Rate -. Logic/Algorithms The rate type functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. however. If the check box is clear. • Inverse-. • Use Base Rate-. the application considers that the conversion rule uses a variable.Use this drop-down list to define the rule used for a selected currency pair. • Reverse Double Cross-Rate -.Divides an amount in the source currency against the exchange rate for the target currency.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount.Uses two Interim currencies to convert the source amount to the target amount. If you select this check box. or float. or fixed. • Double Cross-Rate -. exchange rate and it can be updated daily. • If you select the Global Lock check box. Available rules: • Direct-. the linked child company rate types update with the changes. child companies can link to this rate type. select the Round check box. Conversion Rules • Direct Conversion = Source Currency Amount x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Inverse Conversion = Source Currency Amount/Target Currency Exchange Rate • Cross Rate Conversion = (Source Currency Amount x Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Alternate Cross-Rate Conversion = (Source Currency Amount x Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate • Double Cross-Rate Conversion = ((Source Currency Amount x Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate) x Target Currency Exchange Rate 166 Epicor ERP | 10.700 .Indicates whether the rate defined for this currency pair can update the Effective Rate value. As changes are made to the global record.Uses an intermediate.Select this check box to indicate if the conversion rules from the parent rate type (if one is selected) should be used for the currency pair. • Fixed Rate-.Use this section to define the interim currency used for the Cross-Rate conversion rule or the primary interim currency for the Double-Cross Rate and Reverse Double-Cross Rate conversion rules. • Alternate Cross-Rate -. all other fields on the Conversion Rules . This conversion rule runs the Direct calculation to convert the amounts generated between each currency. organizations.7716 SGD) • Display Rate: 1.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0. Example Balancing Entries Generated by Self-Balancing Accounts In the Original Entries table below.007716 (1JPY = 0.59 JPY) • Actual Rate: 0.007716 • Inverse Conversion: SGD Amount = JPY Amount * 129. Epicor ERP | 10.59 JPY) • Direct Conversion: JPY Amount = SGD Amount * 0. departments. This ensures the book associated with the chart of accounts (COA) maintains a balanced set of records within the segment.007716) • Actual Rate: 129.2959 (1SGD = 129. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Source Scale Factor: 1 • Target Currency: JPY • Target Scale Factor: 100 • Display Rate: 0.0. You also define an offset account for optional segments in the COA. Self-balancing segments use the balancing and the offset accounts designated in the program. When you define an offset account for optional segments.59 Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance designates segments used to create balancing journals.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Reverse Double Cross-Rate Conversion = ((Source Currency Amount/Interim Currency Exchange Rate)/Alternate Interim Currency Exchange Rate)/Target Currency Exchange Rate Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the rate type functionality. This designation enables a balancing journal to automatically post when a transaction occurs between two values defined for the segment. You can designate any controlled segment as self-balancing. the original entries display a $2100 credit to Accounts Payable (2100) in Division A distributed to a single Expense account (6010) with entries to Divisions A and B as well as entries to Projects 10 and 11. You are converting a transaction from Singapore Dollars (SGD) to Japanese Yen (JPY).007716 SGD • Actual Rate: 129.700 167 .007716 (1 JPY = 0. All self-balancing segments must have a balancing account.59 (1 SGD = 129.007716 • Inverted Conversion: SGD Amount=JPY Amount * 129. and projects are often used as self-balancing segments. however. If you do not use a scale factor.59 (1SGD = 129. you can then balance accounts for mandatory segments.7716 (100JPY = 0. Segments that define divisions. the conversion values are the following: • Source Currency: SGD • Target Currency: JPY • Actual Rate: 0.59 If you use scale factors. in Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance. Project is an optional segment and Division is a mandatory segment.700 .Projects 10 and 11 Reference Entry Account Division Project 1 7100 A 1700 2 7100 B 400 TOTAL: Debit Credit 2100 Important Together. Recap of Project 10 Entries Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Original 6010 A 10 1200 Original 6010 B 10 400 1 7000 A 10 1200 2 7000 B 10 400 TOTAL: 1600 Credit 1600 Recap of Project 11 Entries 168 Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Original 6010 A 11 500 1 7000 A 11 Credit 500 Epicor ERP | 10.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Note In this example. the Balancing and Offset Entries for Projects 10 and 11 tables display how balancing entries 1 and 2 bring Project 10 and 11 into balance.Projects 10 and 11 Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Credit 1 7000 A 10 1200 1 7000 A 11 500 2 7000 B 10 400 TOTAL: 2100 Offset Entries . Because of this.0. Division is set up with only a Balancing Account (8000). Project is set up with an Offset Account (7100) and a Balancing Account (7000). Original Entries Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Original 2100 A Original 6010 A 10 1200 Original 6010 A 11 500 Original 6010 B 10 400 TOTAL: 2100 Credit 2100 2100 Balancing Entries . Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Reference Entry Account Primary Components Division Project Debit Credit TOTAL: 500 500 Important The Balancing and Offset Entries 1 and 2 brought Projects 10 and 11 into balance but the Divisions A and B are not in balance. The following three tables demonstrate how balancing entry 3 brings Division A and B into balance. Recap of Division A Entries Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Credit Original 2100 A Original 6010 A 10 1200 Original 6010 A 11 500 1 7000 A 10 1200 1 7000 A 11 500 1 7100 A 2100 1700 TOTAL: 3400 3800 Recap of Division B Entries Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit Original 6010 B 10 400 2 7000 B 10 2 7100 B Credit 400 400 TOTAL: 800 400 Debit Credit Balancing Entries - Divisions A and B Reference Entry Account Division 3 8000 A 3 8000 B Project 400 400 TOTAL: 400 400 Important Balancing entry 3 brings Divisions A and B into balance. In the table below note that each reference entry balances. Recap of All Entries Reference Entry Account Division Original 2010 A Original 6010 A 10 1200 Original 6010 A 11 500 Original 6010 B 10 400 1 7000 A 10 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Project Debit Credit 2100 1200 169 Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Reference Entry Account Division Project Debit 1 7000 A 11 1 7100 A 2 7000 B 2 7100 B 400 3 8000 A 400 3 8000 B Credit 500 1700 10 400 400 TOTAL: 4600 4600 Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > Setup > Self Balancing Segment Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the self-balancing segment functionality in the following program. Self-Balancing Segment Maintenance Available modifiers: • Balancing Account -- Designates the natural account used to process balancing journal amounts. All self-balancing segments must have a balancing account. • Chart of Account -- Use this drop-down list to select the COA you need. The segments available in this COA display in the drop-down list on the Detail sheet; select the segment you want to self-balance from this list. • Level -- Determines the processing order when a COA has multiple self-balancing segments. Processing begins with the segment numbered 1. • Offset Account --Designates the natural account used to create offset balances when an optional segment is self-balancing. • Self-Balancing -- Applies the self-balancing process to the segment when selected. A cleared check box blocks automatic segment balancing Logic/Algorithms The self-balancing segment functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. • Only controlled segments can be self-balancing. • When a transaction occurs for the self-balancing segment, a balancing journal is automatically generated. • The level indicates the order through which segments will be balanced. • Optionally, transactions can also be placed within a offset account. 170 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the self-balancing segment functionality. The COA has two controlled segments: a mandatory division segment and an optional project segment. You define both as self-balancing and use the following accounts. • A balancing account of 8000 for the division segment. • A balancing account of 7000 and an offset account of 7001 for the project segment. A journal credits the revenue accounts for a project owned by Division A and shared with Division B. The journal contains the following lines: Account Division Project Amount 2100 A 4010 A 10 1200 4010 B 10 500 4010 A 11 500 4010 A -2500 300 The 500 amount applies to Project 10, which is the project shared by the two divisions, and must transfer from Division B to Division A to balance the division segment. The balancing process first uses the project segment accounts to offset balancing account entries. Account Division Project Amount 7000 A 10 -1200 7000 A 11 -500 7001 A 7000 B 7001 B 1700 10 -500 500 The process can then create the balancing entries for the division segment. Account Division Project Amount 8000 A 500 8000 B -500 Site Cost ID Maintenance Use Site Cost ID Maintenance to create IDs used as references to cost sets. The cost set then defines the cost method calculations for all the parts manufactured within the sites linked to the cost set. This makes sure that the same cost method is used for all the sites linked to this cost set. If a different costing method is needed between sites, create a separate cost set for each site. The costing results are then calculated accurately, as unit costs are calculated for each part within each cost set. Because each site Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 171 Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide has its own cost set, the costing values are consistent for the site. Although it is possible to link sites with different costing methods to the same cost set, it is not recommended. Site cost identifiers are also used within the Costing Workbench. During the standard cost rollup calculation within the Costing Workbench, the application uses site cost identifiers as a source for the cost amounts. Tip For more information on how site cost IDs are used in the Costing Workbench, refer to the Costing Workbench > Group Detail topic. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Site Cost Maintenance • Production Management > Engineering > Setup > Site Cost Maintenance • System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Cost Maintenance Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the Cost Sets functionality in the following program. Site Cost ID Maintenance You create site cost identifiers within this program. To launch Site Cost ID Maintenance from the Main Menu: • Production Management/Engineering/Setup/ The costing modifiers you define in this program are: • Site Cost ID- This value defines the unique identifier for the cost set. Be sure to enter a meaningful identifier, because on sheets and reports that have limited space, you may only see this value. • Description- This field displays a brief, concise explanation for the cost set. Enter the description value that best describes the purpose for the cost set. • Load Alternate Methods- Select this check box to indicate that this cost set will use alternate methods during the What If cost calculation within the Costing Workbench. An alternate method is a method of manufacturing for a part revision that is different than the base method of manufacturing. • Load Costing Lot Sizes- Select this check box to indicate that this cost set will use Costing Lot Size settings for part/site combinations during the What If cost calculation within the Costing Workbench. A costing lot size is the manufacturing lot size the cost rollup calculation uses to distribute setup costs. • Primary Site- Select the site that is considered the primary site for this cost set. This information is used as the default in the Costing Workbench. • Enable FIFO Layers - Select this check box to enable the maintenance of FIFO costs (layers) as secondary costs for non-FIFO costed parts. Any issue or receipt of the part consumes or creates PartFIFOCost records to reflect the movement of FIFO quantities and costs, in the same manner in which the Epicor application updates/consumes FIFO costed parts. The same validations apply to non-FIFO parts when issuing/consuming quantities (the Epicor application prevents the FIFO costs/quantities from going negative). You still receive customary FIFO negative quantity errors when the FIFO layer is enabled; these stop you from continuing to process these types of transactions. Company Maintenance You select the default cost set for a company within Company Maintenance. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • System Management/Company 172 Epicor ERP | 10.0.700 During the cost rollup calculation within the Costing Workbench. Epicor ERP | 10. use the default cost set defined within the company record. Costing Workbench Use the Costing Workbench to create cost groups and then rollup the estimated cost of each part contained within the group. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Production Management/Job Management/Setup • Material Management/Inventory Management/Setup • Financial Management/Multi-Site/Setup You define the cost set used for this site on the Planning Data sheet: • Site Cost ID.Defines the cost set used with the current site.0. The cost set is then used for the cost method calculations of all the parts manufactured within all the sites within the current company. If you need to change this value. If this value is not defined on the site record. Logic/Algorithms The Cost Sets functionality uses this logic to calculate its results. the values defined within the site cost identifier are used to calculate the standard cost amounts within the current cost group. Site Maintenance You can override the default cost set on specific site records. Use this field or the Copy from Cost Group field to specify the cost group to use as a starting point for your new cost group.700 173 .This is an optional field. Note that changing the site cost ID might change the cost values for the part. This occurs if a costing method on a site linked to the selected cost set is different than the other sites linked to this same cost set. click the Actions menu and select Change Site Cost ID.Defines the cost set used with this company.Same Costing Method Site A and site B both use the Red Group site cost ID (cost set). Cost Sets . use this drop down list to select a specific cost set from which you want to load part cost information. You create and update site records within Site Maintenance. The cost set is then used for the cost method calculations of all the parts manufactured within the selected site. You might select to copy from a Site Cost ID (cost set) rather than from a Cost Group if you want to initiate your new cost group with the current costs from the site assigned to this cost set. Use the cost set defined on the site record. This causes the Costing Workbench to load in all data with the specified cost set from the PartCost table.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components You select the default cost set on the Modules >All Modules > General sheet: • Site Cost ID. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the Cost Sets functionality. To launch this program from the Main Menu: • Production Management/Engineering/Operations/Costing Workbench The following cost set modifier is used within this program: • Copy from Site Cost ID. Launch Site Configuration Control to set up how each site interacts with other modules.700 . Site Maintenance Use Site Maintenance to add and update sites available in the current company to define segment security codes. one site record is created automatically by default.Different Costing Methods Site A uses the Standard costing method and site B uses the Average costing method. define the transfer order parameters the site follows when fulfilling internal sales orders. Use this system management program to pull in the site records you create in Site Maintenance. When a company is created in the Epicor application. If both sites use a different cost set. click the Actions 174 Epicor ERP | 10. Because they are in the same cost set. You can then set up as many sites as you need for each company within your organization. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Site Maintenance • Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Site Maintenance • Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Site Maintenance You define the site cost ID used for this site on the Detail > Detail sheet: • Site Cost ID. If you need to change this value. you must license the Multi-Site module. and the Production Calendar. then only part transactions in site B use the Average costing method. You enter the primary information for each site through this program. the application uses the default value from the company record. You define the primary values for each site within Site Maintenance. To add more than one site record through this program. You can then define the module parameters you need for each site record. If a site cost ID is not selected for the site. however. which determines the costing method used for the parts manufactured at the site.Defines a reference to a cost group. Both sites use the same ALLSITES cost set. The cost group is then used for the cost method calculations of all the parts manufactured or consumed within a site. Rough Cut Horizon.0. Items you define include planning parameters such as Production Preparation Time. Lastly. the average cost values for site B also use the transactions for site A.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Cost Sets . You can also define the cost set. Menu Paths Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Site Maintenance • Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Site Maintenance • Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Site Maintenance Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the site functionality in the following program. Site Maintenance You create and update site records within Site Maintenance. This site record is the default site selected for each part you create within Part Maintenance for the current company. you can define each purchase point within supplier records. Note that each control must belong to a different control type. Suppliers are businesses from whom you purchase products and services. part class.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components menu and select Change Site Cost ID. or Tax ID Num. you also define the GL controls that capture these transfer transactions. or as an approved supplier specific to a part. Use this program to define how taxes are levied and payments are made against purchases through each supplier. Supplier records define several options which activate functionality you use throughout the Epicor application. Supplier records are used in several programs and are crucial for creating purchase orders and Accounts Payable (AP) invoices.700 175 . so you can indicate how this organization ships part quantities to your company. As changes are made to a global supplier record. you can leverage this functionality. The Tax ID Num is important in some countries as businesses identify vendors through their Tax ID number. A supplier record can be defined as a global record within a parent company. Site Configuration Control You define how each site interacts with other modules using the Site Configuration Control program. Supplier records are needed for various multi-company processes. You can associate one or more GL controls with a site record. ID. You can now create separate site details for all your part records within Part Maintenance. If you buy parts from multiple locations from a supplier. These records indicate which posting accounts are used for transactions with the current site. Access the GL control sheets to define which GL controls you wish to use with this site. and consolidated purchasing. use the Supplier Search window to search for and select a specific supplier record. You create records for each site within Site Maintenance. The search results can be sorted by Country. A supplier record must first be on file in the Epicor application before that supplier is available on a purchase order. This occurs if a costing method on a site linked to the site cost ID is different than the other sites linked to this same site cost ID. these changes automatically update within the linked child records. and then child companies within your organization can link to this record. Supplier records also contain information on shipping manifests. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the site functionality.Use the GL control sheets to define the accounts and journal codes available to a site record during the posting process. Because material quantities move between these sites. Supplier records can then be used for central payments. Epicor ERP | 10. Supplier Maintenance Use Supplier Maintenance to create supplier records. Menu Path: System Setup > Company/Site Maintenance > Site Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. inter-company trading.0. You manufacture product in two sites . • GL Controls.the Red site and the Blue site. Name. Users can then select these purchase points on purchase orders and other records. or customer record. Note Once a supplier record is created. If your organization has the Multi-Site license. Note that changing the site cost ID might change the cost for the part. • You cannot select this check box if the Global check box is selected. • IC Trader -. You also use this program to create records for companies who will be intercompany trading partners.Specifies if this supplier record is available for use in other companies. This indicates the external company can purchase items from the current company.700 . If the current supplier is an inter-company trader.Use this drop-down list to define the default selling terms used with this supplier record. you select a selling terms record which is identical to the selling terms record selected on the customer trading partner. the Global indicator is highlighted.0. • Global Lock -. the Epicor application automatically copies any updates made to this global supplier record to any records linked to it in a child company. When selected. External Company Configuration Launch this program to create inter-company trading partnerships.Select the customer identifier for the external company. When selected. Supplier Maintenance You use Supplier Maintenance to both create global records within parent companies and then pull in these global supplier records within child companies. 176 Epicor ERP | 10.Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Supplier • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Supplier • Material Management > Inventory Management > Setup > Supplier • Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > Setup > Supplier • Material Management > Purchase Management > Setup > Supplier • Material Management > Supplier Relationship Management > Setup > Supplier • Production Management > Job Management > Setup > Supplier • Production Management > Quality Assurance > Setup > Supplier • Service Management > Expense Management > Setup > Supplier • Service Management > Time Management > Setup > Supplier Programs and Their Modifiers You leverage and modify the supplier functionality in the following program.Indicates this supplier's transactions can be moved between another company defined as an inter-company trading partner. the IC Trader indicator is highlighted. If the IC Trader check box is selected.Indicates that this global supplier record cannot be updated through changes made by the parent company. Items you modify: • Customer ID -. you cannot select the Global check box. You define these partnerships on the Detail > Company Information sheet. Items you modify: • Global -. When selected. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. • Terms -. 0. While in External Company Maintenance. Epicor ERP | 10. clicking on each drop-down list: • Supplier ID -. You navigate to the Brown company. however. you indicate this supplier record can be used to process inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs). After you select Multi-Company as your External System.Select the customer identifier for the current company.BLUE (current company) Now these two companies can create inter-company purchase orders (ICPOs) and buy/sell parts and services from each other. Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the supplier functionality. you navigate to the Blue company and do the same thing. making sure both terms records are identical.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components • Partner Customer ID -. Inter-Company Trading When the IC Trader check box is selected.700 177 . This indicates the current company can sell items to the external company. Likewise you launch Supplier Maintenance. • Partner Supplier ID -.BLUE (current company) • Customer ID -. You can then select this supplier record within External Company Maintenance in the Inter-Company Trading section. within your organization. Child companies can then launch Supplier Maintenance and pull in this record through the Link Supplier functionality. indicating these records are IC Traders. This indicates the external company can sell items to the current company. You first create Net 30 purchasing and selling terms.Select the supplier identifier for the external company. You then define the following options.Select the supplier identifier for the current company. Brown and Blue. This indicates the current company can purchase items from the external company. Logic/Algorithms The supplier functionality uses this logic to calculate its results.BROWN (current company) • Customer ID -. • Supplier ID -. You now launch External Company Maintenance. Inter-Company Trading Example You are setting up an inter-company trading relationship between two companies.BLUE • Partner Supplier ID -. Global Suppliers When the Global check box is selected.BROWN (current company) After you save this record. enter these companies as suppliers. you select the following records: • Supplier ID -.BROWN • Partner Customer ID -.BLUE • Partner Customer ID -. You select the Enable check box to activate this functionality. you define the trading partnership within the Inter-Company Trading section.BROWN • Partner Supplier ID -. You then launch Customer Maintenance and enter both companies. this record is passed to other companies via the multi-company process. and indicate these records are IC Traders. and password. Dashboard Use this program to create a multi-company dashboard. When you select the Dashboard Developer check box on the current user account. Menu Path: Executive Analysis > Business Activity Management > General Operations > Dashboard Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. and other company information. phone numbers. you can also define addresses. The System Administrator grants security permissions based on the user's role in the company. Anyone who accesses the Epicor application must be set up in this program. In this program. security access. You do this by incorporating global BAQs and cross company into a new dashboard.700 .Primary Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide User Account Security Maintenance Use User Account Security Maintenance to enter basic information. The user launches this mode by clicking the Tools menu and selecting Developer. this user can launch developer mode within the Dashboard program. User Account Maintenance In order for a user to create multi-company dashboards. name. Important In order to create dashboards. and application privileges for users. Users must have a defined user ID. Select the following option on the Options sheet: • Dashboard Developer -. You then create the views required to display the data on the multi-company or global dashboard. you need to be assigned Dashboard Developer rights within User Account Maintenance. Logic/Algorithms The user account functionality uses this logic for multi-company dashboards. Users are commonly created by the Epicor application implementation team. 178 Epicor ERP | 10. you need to assign dashboard developer rights to this person's user account.0. Programs and Their Modifiers You modify the user account functionality in the following program. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • ICE External > Security > User Security • System Setup > Security Maintenance > User Account Security Maintenance Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.Indicates this user can create dashboards within the current company. 0.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Primary Components Example(s) The following example(s) illustrate how you use the user account functionality with multi-company dashboards. You click on the Security sheet and give B. Timmons is in charge of creating multi-company dashboards within the Red company. Epicor ERP | 10.700 179 . You navigate to the Red company and launch User Account Maintenance. Timmons logs into the Epicor application. B. Timmons dashboard developer rights. Then next time this B. this user can create and modify dashboards. Posts transactions that contain reversing amounts.00 debit to the same account. You cannot choose the details you reverse and cannot partially reverse a detail.00 credit to the payroll accrual. Items like consolidation types. a recent consolidation. you estimate payroll as a $1000. 180 Epicor ERP | 10. Automatic Transaction Reversal Use Automatic Transaction Reversal to cancel a posted journal. This type of journal contains a negative debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original journal increases the account balance.You use this program to undo. the journal contains a positive debit or credit line when the debit or credit line on the original entry decreases the account balance.0. this mode is known as ordinary storno. you can also select journals and flag them for red storno processing. Available cancellation modes: • Reverse Transaction . • Reverse as Red Storno . Cancellation of journals reduces tax consequences in countries such as Russia and in other jurisdictions where tax is based on turnover in general ledger accounts. and global tablesautomatic transaction reversals and purchase order suggestions are described in this section. a second entry is created as a $1000. You can reverse the most recently posted journals. you can then re-post the journals. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > General Ledger > General Operations > Automatic Transaction Reversal • Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Automatic Transaction Reversal Process Use The Automatic Transaction Reversal program is used with the following multi-site processes.Posts debit amounts equal to credit amounts on the original journal and credit amounts equal to debit amounts on the original journal. A red storno journal posts a negative debit line to the same account to cancel the increase from the original detail.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components This section of the Multi-SiteCompany Setup Technical Reference Guide documents the process components you use to set up the multi-site functionalityyour company. a posted journal line debits an asset account. This prevents values from being doubled within the posted results. • Consolidation -. In GL Journal Entry. For example.700 . In Russia. For example. external companies. or reverse. After you make the corrections you need. When reversed. Reversals apply to all details in a journal and to the entire amount on a journal line. • Inter-Company Purchase Orders -. When purchase order suggestions are processed.You can launch this program if the Supplier Relationship Management module license code is installed. If you make a change to a purchase order release that is tied to a consolidated purchase order initiated by the central purchasing company. • Reduce .Used when a lower quantity is needed at the need by date of the purchase order.Use this program to suggest changes on consolidated POs. • Buyer Workbench . the order release quantity is set to zero and a manufacturing suggestion is created for the related job record.Used when parts are not scheduled to arrive to meet the need by date.Use this program to suggest changes on ICPOs. If the Generate Purchasing Suggestions process is run again while this program is open. • Consolidated Purchasing -. you can cancel a specific detail line on these records. review the Incoming ICPO Suggestions help topics. Epicor ERP | 10. For more information.Used when the quantity required is not high enough to meet the demand on the need by date on the purchase order.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Change PO Suggestions Use the Change PO Suggestions program to change existing purchase orders based on purchasing suggestions created by the Generate Purchasing Suggestions process. the application evaluates all time phase information and recommends changes to existing purchase orders such as: • Expedite .700 181 . Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Change PO Suggestions You can launch this program from these additional locations: • Purchase Order Entry . the order release is void. Besides making changes to an ICPO. you need to clear the data in this program and re-populate with another search.Used when parts are scheduled to arrive before their need by date. You use this program to make changes on both consolidated purchase orders and intercompany purchase orders (ICPOs).Used when the demand created no longer exists. if the related order release is linked to a job.This program is located on the Actions menu. • Postpone . However.0. If the related order release is not linked to a job record. • Cancel . Process Use The Change PO Suggestions program is used with the following multi-site processes. • Increase . your change is sent back to the central purchasing company as a purchase order change suggestion. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Consolidate to Parent Process Use Consolidate to Parent Entry is used with the following multi-site processes. You use commands in the Actions Menu of Consolidate to Parent Entry to run the consolidation. intercompany sales. This process ensures source and target books reflect the same opening balances. You create consolidation definitions within Consolidation Definition Maintenance. The consolidation process creates journals for source COA segments that maintain balances. Consolidate to Parent Entry: • Specifies the consolidation definition used to control execution of the consolidation.0. Run this program after you have used Consolidate to Parent Entry to post journals for the last fiscal period in a book. The closing balance for the previous year is calculated using the company's base currency and the last period's exchange rate.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Consolidate to Parent Entry Consolidate to Parent Entry creates consolidation journals from a source book's chart of accounts (COA). ownership of common stock. Running this process: • Zeros all income statement accounts. • Uses the last period's exchange rate to calculate retained earnings. and other elimination entries.) You use consolidation journals to validate entries and adjust journals to account for intercompany loans.700 . 182 Epicor ERP | 10. • Consolidations Consolidated Year End Process Consolidated Year End posts consolidation balances for a fiscal year and creates opening consolidation balances for the next fiscal year. The definition determines the consolidation mode and whether the consolidation posts journals to a book or an output file. • Calculates opening balances for balance sheet accounts. This program specifies the consolidation period and the consolidation definition used to run the process. (Chart of Accounts Maintenance defines the account segments that maintain balances. Run this process against all books used to generate consolidation journals. • Defines exchange rates used to convert balances in consolidation journals. • Maps fiscal periods in a source book to periods in the target book. You define all of these options within Consolidation Definition Maintenance. • Defaults to run consolidations from Consolidate to Parent Entry. you must define the consolidation rate types.700 183 . the target book. Consolidations can occur continuously or periodically. • Different exchange accounts for the source book and for remote parents. the source book. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Definition Epicor ERP | 10. an intermediate book. These settings include currency conversion defaults. • The consolidation rate type used when an account category has no consolidation type. • Whether the process outputs journals to a book within the database or creates an output file used to transfer journals to a book in another Epicor 9 database. Chart of Accounts Mapping defines these maps. losses and gains result from changes in the currency exchange rates. and then to a target book. the intermediate book. which is a consolidation-type book. the consolidation mode.0. Before you can create a consolidation definition. In the periodic mode. and the target book. and the chart of accounts the intermediate and target books share. The consolidation process creates journals to reflect these changes and posts them to the account. the consolidation type. Consolidation definitions control the transfer of accounts from one or more source books to an intermediate book. • Whether journals post to an intermediate book and the target book simultaneously or post to an intermediate book before posting to the target book. Settings in this program define: • Whether a consolidation occurs continuously or periodically. In some cases.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Consolidated Year End Process Use Consolidate to Parent Entry is used with the following multi-site processes. Each consolidation definition defines a target book. An intermediate book allows validation of consolidation journals and tracking of consolidation entries. Continuous consolidations occur between two standard-type books. • Consolidations Consolidation Definition Maintenance Consolidation definitions determine the settings that control the consolidation between source and target books. journals post from a source book to a target book via an intermediate book. • The mapping of accounts between the source book and an intermediate or target book. or it can be a target book you use in an external application. and one or more source books from which the financial data originates. The target book can be available in another company. The balance method uses year-to-date balances to determine period balances for an account. You can use the period-end method to apply a spot exchange rate or the daily-average method to apply an average exchange rate for a consolidation period. • Consolidations Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance defines consolidation rate types. consolidations involve the posting of consolidation journals from a subsidiary's book to an intermediate book or the target book of the parent. • Consolidation rate types determine the exchange rate used during consolidations. the same machine. Currency rate types define the rules used to convert source and target currency pairs. this machine is worth $500 in euros. Calculation methods allow the use of balances or period movements. The following table lists typical applications of consolidation rate types and consolidation types. still worth $1. which convert balances when consolidated books use different currencies. Period End N/A Example You need to track the value of your assets in euros. however. Daily Average N/A COA categories used with monetary balance sheet accounts Period End Balance COA categories used with non-monetary balance sheet accounts. Consolidation Rate Type Consolidation Type COA categories for income statement accounts. defined in COA Category Maintenance. This includes fixed assets.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Use Consolidation definitions are used with the following multi-site processes. This value applies to the source book in a consolidation definition. inventory. Consolidation types apply to account categories. During period two. These settings apply when the currency of the source book differs from the currency of the book to which the journals post. During period one. Typically. The consolidation definition supplies default exchange rates applied to consolidation journals posted from the source book. Tip Do not confuse currency rate types with consolidation rate types and consolidation types. Period movements use period balances to calculate account amounts Consolidation rate types apply to consolidation types and to consolidation definitions.0. after consolidation is run. This value applies to the source book in a consolidation definition.000 USD. • Consolidation types determine the method used to calculate account balances and the consolidated rate type applied to them. and equity accounts.. you have a machine that is worth $1. you define a consolidation type that tracks the exchange rate by month end. Daily Average Period Movement The default consolidation rate type for income statement accounts.700 . Typically applies to. including retained earnings. Exchange rate groups supply values and effective dates used in the calculation of consolidation exchange rates.. Consolidation types and consolidation rate types determine the exchange rates and balance amounts used during consolidations. To do this. is now worth $750 in euros because of the month end rate. 184 Epicor ERP | 10. Either Period End or Daily Period Movement Average The default consolidation rate type for balance sheet accounts.000 USD. 700 Balance Either Period End or Daily Period Movement Average 185 . and equity accounts.0. This average is then used to calculate the value of the receipts (from pesos to euros) that come from your subsidiary.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Example Your main company is based in Germany. The following table lists typical applications of consolidation rate types and consolidation types. you consolidate the exchange rate through a daily average. Calculation methods allow the use of balances or period movements. Exchange rate groups supply values and effective dates used in the calculation of consolidation exchange rates. Consolidation types and consolidation rate types determine the exchange rates and balance amounts used during consolidations. • Consolidation types determine the method used to calculate account balances and the consolidated rate type applied to them. consolidations involve the posting of consolidation journals from a subsidiary's book to an intermediate book or the target book of the parent. Consolidation types apply to account categories. To do this. Daily Average Period Movement The default consolidation rate type for income statement accounts. The system calculates an average exchange rate for the current period. Consolidation Rate Type Consolidation Type COA categories for income statement accounts. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Rate Type Process Use Consolidation rate types are used with the following multi-site processes. • Consolidation rate types determine the exchange rate used during consolidations. The consolidation definition supplies default exchange rates applied to consolidation journals posted from the source book. Daily Average N/A COA categories used with monetary balance sheet accounts Period End COA categories used with non-monetary balance sheet accounts. The balance method uses year-to-date balances to determine period balances for an account. inventory. These settings apply when the currency of the source book differs from the currency of the book to which the journals post. • Consolidations Consolidation Type Maintenance Consolidation Type Maintenance determines the method used to calculate account balances during consolidations and the consolidation rate type applied to the balances. You can use the period-end method to apply a spot exchange rate or the daily-average method to apply an average exchange rate for a consolidation period. Typically.. but you need to calculate the income from your subsidiary company in Mexico. This value applies to the source book in a consolidation definition. Consolidation types apply to account categories. defined in COA Category Maintenance. including retained earnings. Epicor ERP | 10. Period movements use period balances to calculate account amounts Consolidation rate types apply to consolidation types and to consolidation definitions. This includes fixed assets. Typically applies to.. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Period End N/A Example You need to track the value of your assets in euros. you define a consolidation type that tracks the exchange rate by month end. you consolidate the exchange rate through a daily average. During period one. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > Setup > Consolidation Type Process Use Consolidation types are used with the following multi-site processes. you must create an external system that uses the SERVICEBUS transfer method. you have a machine that is worth $1. still worth $1. the same machine. An external system record is required for all of the multi-company processes: • Global Customer Credit • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing 186 Epicor ERP | 10.Process Components The default consolidation rate type for balance sheet accounts. after consolidation is run. this machine is worth $500 in euros. During period two. This method links the outbound and inbound tables together between multiple companies. create an external system that uses the DIRECT transfer method. The system calculates an average exchange rate for the current period. If your system has multiple companies contained within a single database.000 USD. This average is then used to calculate the value of the receipts (from pesos to euros) that come from your subsidiary. • Consolidations External System Maintenance Use External System Maintenance to add or update the integration records you use to transfer data between multiple companies within your database. the Windows Azure™ Service Bus application is not needed. You must set up an external system for all companies which use multi-company functionality. To do this. because these companies are all on the same database. This value applies to the source book in a consolidation definition. However. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External System Maintenance Process Use External systems are used with the following multi-site processes.700 . Example Your main company is based in Germany. This third party application links multiple databases and then transfers the multi-company data. You can transfer data between multiple companies through two methods.000 USD. however. To do this.0. is now worth $750 in euros because of the month end rate. If your system uses multiple databases that each contain a separate company. but you need to calculate the income from your subsidiary company in Mexico. The external system defines the connection method. Now ServiceBus can pass data between both companies.like sending customer data. in External Company Configuration. you first indicate which external system the Epicor application will use with the external company. In a multi-company environment. in Epicor Education. and review an existing External Company ID (for instance. For a description of all available sheets and fields. part. select the external system . To complete the relationship. Example You are creating a new company. you can create an external company so that you can share global customer. Process Use External companies are used with the following multi-site processes.700 187 . To review the existing setup. You create external company records to pass data to and from the current company to an external company. a company available on an external database. and indicate again this relationship uses the SERVICEBUS external system. Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Maintenance Menu Path: System Setup > External System Integration > External Company Configuration Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. you create an external company for EPIC06 within the EPIC02 company and indicate this relationship uses the SERVICEBUS external system. refer to the application help. for example you can select DIRECT for companies that exist on the same database. supplier and financial data with the external company. To do this. Set up external companies for all of the multi-company functionality: • Global Customer Credit Epicor ERP | 10. To do this. Tip External companies have already been configured in each of the Demonstration Database companies. You need this new company to communicate with an existing company EPIC06. or SERVICEBUS for companies that exist on multiple databases. navigate to External Company Maintenance. defining the suppliers and customers involved in this trading relationship. in each company. PO suggestions. EPIC02. Next. review the External Company ID: EPIC02). You then create an external company record for each outside company you want to share data with the current company.Multi-Company Direct.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations • Consolidations • Multi-Company Dashboards External Company Maintenance Use External Company Maintenance to either establish direct relationships with companies within the same database or create remote connections to companies on other databases using applications like Windows Azure™ Service Bus and Epicor Commerce Connect. you can define the specific types of interactions you want to occur between the two companies . supplier data. you then launch External Company Maintenance within the other company and enter a matching external company record. and so on for each record. for example. You then navigate to EPIC06 and create an external company record for EPIC02.0. You also set up the Inter-Company Trading functionality in this program. • Requisitions marked as Send To Purchasing . You must be run this process before using New PO Suggestions and Change PO Suggestions. This program also deletes the old PO suggestions. You can then review and process the purchase order suggestions from other companies.If you clear the Include Contract PO Parts check box.For time-phased purchase orders. this program includes unlinked sales order releases and releases with associated PO suggestions. It always excludes previously linked Buy to Order (BTO) sales order releases. it also includes active parts on purchase contracts when generating purchase suggestions. then the Epicor application references the purchase lead time set at the supplier price break level for the part and its primary supplier.For requisitions. Requisitions can be removed from the application only by ordering the requisition item or manually deleting the requisition.700 . • Unlinked Buy To Order (BTO) sales order releases . If there is no purchase lead time on the part or site record.0. If you select this check box.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations • Consolidations • Multi-Company Dashboards Generate Purchasing Suggestions Use Generate Purchasing Suggestions to automatically create a list of suggested purchases based on time-phased information. you can run a full regeneration by selecting the Run Consolidated Purch check box. Generate Suggestions bypasses active parts on purchase contracts. Generate Purchasing Suggestions builds suggestions from: • Time-phased information . and only includes parts on standard purchase orders. If the application is set up for consolidated purchasing and you are logged into the central purchasing company. the program deletes and rebuilds some or all time-phased purchase orders as appropriate based on the date the suggestions are generated and the selected processing option. You create actual purchase orders from these suggestions in Purchase Order Entry. If you use the Regenerative mode. Only one user can run this function at a time. the program does not delete or change the information. Purchase order suggestions are based on time-phased information such as: • Direct job material • Inventory requirements • Job subcontract operations When generate suggestions. and order release identification information stored in order release records to generate purchase order suggestions. When you run Generate Purchase Suggestions: • Use the Selection sheet to select the parameters for the process. • Use the Filter sheet to select the sites to include in the generation process. sales order. • Purchase contract schedules .This program uses the ship. 188 Epicor ERP | 10. sales order line. order quantity and supplier. selecting the Run Generate Purchase Schedules check box designates that purchase contract schedules should be generated during the current Generate Suggestions session. Generate Purchasing Suggestions first references the part or site record for the part's purchase lead time. the selected fields update with information passed along from the changed global record.700 189 . • Consolidated Purchasing -. SUPPLIER (VENDOR). and CURRENCY. For more information on how to review the status of the Generate Purchasing Suggestions process. • Inter-Company Purchase Orders -.Use this program to suggest changes on consolidated POs.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Note Selecting the Run Generate Purchase Schedules check box causes the Generate Suggestions program to perform the same processing that takes place when you run the Generate Purchase Schedules program. review the System Monitor topics in the Application Help.Use this program to suggest changes on ICPOs. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions • Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions Menu Path You can launch this program from the Main Menu in these locations: Menu Path: Material Management > Purchase Contracts Management > General Operations > Generate Suggestions Process Use The Generate Purchasing Suggestions program is used with the following multi-site processes.0. When the global record is updated within the parent company. Global Table Maintenance Use Global Table Maintenance to specify which fields update when global records are pulled into your current company. Leverage this program to define which global fields are linked when you integrate data from multiple companies. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Accounts Payable > Setup > Global Table • Financial Management > Accounts Receivable > Setup > Global Table • System Setup > External System Integration > Global Table Epicor ERP | 10. Available shared tables include CUSTOMER. PART. Several master tables can share data between multiple companies. The consolidation process uses an output file to transfer data when the parent company runs on a different Epicor database than the subsidiary company. Additionally. A consolidation definition can specify a target book on a remote parent in a different database. you can post journals to the target book.0.700 . the journals transfer balances from a source book owned by a subsidiary (child) company to a consolidated book owned by its parent company. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • Financial Management > Multi-Site > General Operations > Import Consolidation From Subsidiary Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access. Process Use The Import Consolidation From Subsidiary program is used with the following multi-site processes. You must indicate which tables can share data for global records in all companies which use multi-company functionality. Typically. it results in the output of target journals to a flat file in ASCII format. Global tables need to be defined for all of the multi-site processes: • Global Customer Credit • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations • Consolidations • Multi-Company Dashboards Import Consolidation From Subsidiary The Import Consolidation from Subsidiary program imports journals from a book in a different Epicor database. • Consolidations 190 Epicor ERP | 10. The import transfers subsidiary account balances to a consolidated chart of accounts (COA) for use in financial reports. These values are used in journal entry and batch processing of the journals. The Import Consolidation From Subsidiary program also defines the book which will update and post the journals in the imported file. After you import this file.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Use Global tables are used with the following multi-site processes. this program associates journal groups and codes with the imported journals. This program uses an output file that contains journals from the source book to create journals in the target book. When you use the definition in Consolidate to Parent Entry. Launch Incoming Inter-Company PO Suggestions Maintenance and find and select the Inter-Company PO.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Incoming Linked PO Suggestions Use Incoming Inter-Company PO Suggestions Maintenance (ICPO) to convert a purchase order created in one company into a sales order within your company. the order release quantity is set to zero and a manufacturing suggestion is created for the related job record.0.Setup topic. You can also cancel a specific detail line on an inter-company PO. review the Inter-Company Purchase Orders . What Happens Incoming Inter-Company PO Suggestions Maintenance functionality improves communication between two companies.700 191 . Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > General Operations > Incoming Intercompany PO Suggestions Tip The CRM menu path is: Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > General Operations > Incoming Intercompany PO Suggestions Process Use The Incoming Linked PO Suggestions program is used with the following multi-site processes. If the related order release is not linked to a job record. use the Process All Suggestions command. Note To learn more about how to set up your company for inter-company trading. select the Process All Suggestions command from the Actions menu. your company must install the Multi-Site Management module. You can then create transactions between different manufacturing sites within the same company. select this option in External Company Maintenance. Important To use the Incoming Inter-Company PO Suggestions Maintenance functionality. Next. Refer to the Multicompany BTO Drop Shipment topic for more details. euros and dollars). As you send releases against the sales order created from a purchase order (PO). Companies that use the Epicor application can also send ICPO Suggestions to another company that uses Epicor applications. As long as the purchase order was created in the Epicor application and sent electronically. the company’s PO record automatically updates with this release information. the Epicor application converts the monetary values to the correct local currency. If the related order release is linked to a job. Example You first receive a PO from the other site. The two companies must both use the Epicor application and be set up for inter-company trading. As you satisfy releases and lines on the sales order. this command is found under the Actions menu. Your company must also be set up as an Inter-Company Trader. To turn approved ICPO suggestions into sales orders. Review the information and select the Ready for Order check box. If the two sites use different currencies (for example. you can automatically generate sales orders from this purchase order. the order release is voided. the ICPO information automatically updates within the original Epicor database. The ICPO turns into a sales order. • Inter-Company Purchase Orders Epicor ERP | 10. The sheets in this program enable you to review and approve each inter-company purchase order (PO). and all other multi-company related information. data is transferred between companies that are set up to share information. When this process executes. global currency information.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Integrated Table Workbench Use the Integrated Table Workbench to manually correct records coming into the Epicor application from external integration systems. The process is similar to the Multi-Company Server Process. This workbench is valuable when an incoming record was less than complete. The process can be executed using one of two logging options: Basic and Verbose. Once this interval schedule is activated. global suppliers.0. the process transfers multi-company records as needed between the companies. The Multi-Company Direct Server Process sends and receives inter-company purchase orders. Records listed in this workbench are those for which an error has been identified. from one company to another company. and select the Recurring check box. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • System Setup > External System Integration > Integrated Table Workbench Important This program is not available in the Epicor Web Access.700 . you can reconcile the discrepancy immediately in the current application database and company. Verbose logging level has the same logging as Basic with additional logging for each individual message in the Multi-Company Direct Server log. as well as a copy of the inbound and outbound XML document saved to disk. To establish a regular transfer of data. Process Use The Integrated Table Workbench can be used to correct issues for the following multi-site processes. Basic logging level provides counts of inbound and outbound records being processed in the Multi-Company Direct Server log. inter-company invoices. global parts. with the only exception that it holds the XML message being transferred between companies in memory rather than transferring the message by Microsoft Service Bus. 192 Epicor ERP | 10. global customers. Rather than update the record in the other system and re-run a process. attach the process to an Interval type schedule in System Agent Maintenance. • Global Customer Credit • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations • Consolidations Multi-Company Direct Server Process Use the Multi-Company Direct Server Process to transfer global and inter-company data between two or more companies that share the same database. multi-company GL journal entries. inter-company shipments. consolidated purchase orders. this process uses Microsoft Service Bus to write multi-company records to the outbound table in the sending company and then this data next updates the inbound table on the receiving company. and customer information from one company to another company. the process transfers multi-company records as needed between the companies.700 193 . • Global Customer Credit • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations Epicor ERP | 10. To establish a regular transfer of data. • Global Customer Credit • Inter-Company Trading • Central AP Invoice Payment • Consolidated Purchasing • Multi-Company Journals • AP Allocations • Consolidations -. supplier. this process is not required to consolidate books contained within the same company. You run this process to send and receive inter-company purchase orders. Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Server Process Process Use The Multi-Company Server process is used with the following multi-site functions. and select the Recurring check box. Multi-Company Server Process Use the Multi-Company Server Process to update records across companies on separate databases. To transfer this data between databases.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • System Management > Schedule Processes > Multi-Company Direct Server Process Process Use The Multi-Company Direct Server process is used with the following multi-site functions.0. These databases can then exchange data through the Microsoft Service Bus application. Once active. attach the process to an Interval type schedule in System Agent Maintenance.Note however. and transfer part. You can also specify a site and cut-off date for the suggestions. New PO Suggestions Use New PO Suggestions to process purchase order (PO) suggestions created by the Generate Suggestions process. • Inter-Company Purchase Orders -. are logged into the central purchasing company. the inter-company trader’s PO record automatically updates with this information. The company can reject or accept these suggestions through the Change PO Suggestions program. Send ICPO Suggestions Use the Send Inter-Company Purchase Order Suggestions program to both create and email suggestions to a company that sent you an inter-company purchase order (ICPO).Use this program to create new suggestions for consolidated POs. and Send Forecast programs use the unit of measures specified in the Our Quantity and Supplier Qty fields to create forecasts.700 .Use this program to create new suggestions on ICPOs. 194 Epicor ERP | 10.Note however. If you have the Epicor application set up to handle consolidated purchasing. Launch the Search function to pull in PO suggestions for a specific buyer or the buyers.Process Components Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide • Consolidations -. and ran Generate Suggestions with full regeneration with the Run Consolidated Purch check box selected. review the Change PO Suggestions and Forecast Entry topics. or Requests For Quotes (RFQ). Menu Path Navigate to this program from the Main Menu: • > New PO Suggestions • Material Management > Purchase Management > General Operations > New PO Suggestions Process Use The Change PO Suggestions program is used with the following multi-site processes. clear the data and re-populate it with another search. If Generate Suggestions runs again while this program is open. As you send suggestions against the sales order created from an inter-company purchase order. The sales order within your database is then updated with the response to the suggestions. you can use this program to review and process PO suggestions from other companies. • Consolidated Purchasing -. These suggestions can also be interpreted by this company as sales forecast information. For more information on this functionality.and purchase orders. this process is not required to consolidate books contained within the same company.0. This functionality improves communication between the two companies. Use the various sheets and Actions menu options in the program to add and modify information before generating new purchase orders. The Generate Purchase Order and Generate RFQ. Vista. or Vantage. review the Incoming ICPO Suggestions Maintenance topics. For more information. review the External Company Maintenance topics. a user at the purchasing company creates a PO using your supplier record. Menu Path: Sales Management > Order Management > General Operations > Send Intercompany PO Suggestions Tip The CRM menu path is: Customer Relationship Management > Order Management > General Operations > Send Intercompany PO Suggestions Process Use The Send PO Suggestions program is used with the following multi-site processes.700 195 .Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Process Components Important If you do not know how to process an inter-company PO. You set up trading partner relationships within External Company Maintenance. it then automatically becomes an inter-company PO.0.Use this program to send changes on ICPOs. you also need to install the Multi-Site Management module. Epicor ERP | 10. When this functionality is set up. To activate this functionality. your company must be entered as a supplier on the external company record for the purchasing company. • Inter-Company Purchase Orders -. Tip You can set up your company to receive inter-company POs from other companies which use the Epicor application. For this functionality to work. so you can log into both companies. 7.Multi-Site Functionality in Action Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Functionality in Action This section contains case studies which demonstrate various multi-site functions in action. click Save on the Standard toolbar. You first create identical purchase and selling terms for the Blue and Green companies. 5. 9. 1. launch Purchase Terms Maintenance. You next must create the selling terms you need. You create and save the following purchasing terms: • Code: 30 • Description: Net 30 • Number of Payments: 1 • Terms Type: Days • Number of Days: 30 3. For the Customer ID value. 6. Use this section as a guide to help you implement these functions into the workflow of your organization. be sure you enter the identifier for the company defined within the Epicor Administration Console. two companies within the same organization. you need to set up the inter-company trading relationship between the Blue and Green companies. From the Terms drop-down list. Inter-Company Trading Scenario . Navigate to the Billing-Detail sheet. Select the IC Trader check box. Set up the inter-company trading relationship between the companies. 8. Intercompany Scenario Blue and Green. You enter the same terms record using the above details. You then save the terms record. Within the Green company. 4. Launch Terms Maintenance. 10. Launch Supplier Maintenance. Launch Customer Maintenance.0.Setup To begin. You enter BLUE in this field. Create the purchase terms you need for buying items from the Blue company. 196 Epicor ERP | 10. 2. Now set up the Blue company as an inter-company supplier. You have System Manager rights. Add more details to the BLUE customer record as you need.700 . so that you can select this record on inter-company trading. select Net 30. Create a customer record for the Blue company. When you finish. engage in inter-company trading. Enter the price breaks you need and click Save. You enter 3 to indicate it takes three working days for part quantities to arrive from the Blue company in Minneapolis. From this drop-down list. Make sure the customer. You enter BLUE in this field. and selling terms identifiers are the same as those you defined in the Green company. 25. Enter the Transfer Days to External Company value you need. Now define the inter-company trading relationship between the external BLUE company and the current GREEN company. You are ready to create inter-company purchase orders for the Blue company. supplier. select the Enable check box. For the Supplier ID value. 17. Navigate to External Company Maintenance. 14. You have finished setting up this inter-company trading relationship within the Green company.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Functionality in Action 11. Create a supplier record for the company for which the current company will do trades. 22. Epicor ERP | 10. 21. Click the Actions menu and select Price List. you select Multi-Company Direct (or Multi-Company for Service Bus connections). Also be sure to launch Price List Maintenance and import the price list you created for the COMP-X part. From the External System drop-down list. You now must create an external company record to define how the Blue company will interact with the Green company. 19. Search for and select the BLUE company external company record. Navigate to External Company Configuration. purchase terms. be sure you enter the identifier for the company defined within the Epicor Administration Console. 18. This value defines the number of days required to transfer an order from the BLUE company to the GREEN company. Within the Inter-Company Trading section. You can now create a price list for the COMP-X part. Enter these values: • Supplier ID: BLUE • Partner Customer ID: GREEN • Customer ID: BLUE • Partner Supplier ID: GREEN 24. 12.700 197 . select Net 30. Save this price list to a folder you can access from the Blue company later. The inter-company trading relationship is now set up between the Blue and the Green companies. 20. You then click New and create an external company record for the BLUE company. 13.0. Click Save. Select the AP (purchase) Terms you will use with this supplier record. 23. Now navigate to the Blue company and repeat these steps. 15. 16. Click on the Actions menu and select Export. Select the IC Trader check box. The user clicks on the Actions menu and selects Add Intercompany Receipt. This check box is used for the consolidated purchasing process. line detail. Next. 1. Fill in the header. 18. An AP invoice can now be created to complete the inter-company transaction. Notice the label for this check box changes to Approved.700 . 4. 3.Process You need to order a 200 quantity of COMP-X from the Blue company. 6. you launch Customer Shipment Entry. 7. click on the Actions menu and selects New Purchase Suggestions. The selling company can begin fulfilling the order as requested. 2. The Incoming ICPO Suggestions program displays. 14. Important Do not select the Global PO check box. 19. You create a new purchase order for the Blue company. Within the Blue (purchasing) company. 12.Multi-Site Functionality in Action Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Inter-Company Trading Scenario . 11. The user closes the Incoming ICPO Suggestions program. you launch AR Invoice Entry and create a new invoice. 5. Generate the packing slip for the shipment and then select the Shipped check box.0. and releases information. Now click on the Actions menu and selects Generate Suggestions. 17. 9. The user reviews the suggestions. To do this. 10. Adds any miscellaneous charges needed on the suggestion and select the Ready for Order check box. This shipment record is automatically sent to the purchasing company. 13. Within the Green company. click on the Actions menu. a user navigates to Sales Order Entry. This record displays as a sales order within this company. 15. this person clicks the Actions menu and selects Process All Suggestions. The user at the Blue (purchasing) company launches Receipt Entry. highlights the Get sub-menu and selects Get Shipment. 16. Next. Back at the Green company. 8. 198 Epicor ERP | 10. Back at the Green selling company. If the user wishes to turn an ICPO suggestion into a sales order. The purchase order's information is sent across to the purchasing company. This user clicks on the Actions menu and selects Incoming to Linked ICPO Suggestions. The ICPO is now a sales order. this person selects its Ready for Order check box. Approve the purchase order by clearing the Unapproved check box. The user pulls in the purchase order and closes it. you will create an inter-company purchase order (ICPO). you navigate to Purchase Order Entry. When the user finishes accepting and rejecting the ICPO suggestions. 2. Consolidation Scenario . The United Kingdom location will hold the main book which receives consolidation information from the Mexico location. From the External System drop-down list. the Mexico company needs two books. you select the Multi-Company option. For the External Company ID enter "UK" and for the Description field. Epicor ERP | 10. the other for the Mexico (MXO) location. is a manufacturer in the United Kingdom which has an assembly facility in Mexico. Define how the external company handles financial information it sends and receives from the current Mexico company.Setup This topic describes how you set up the consolidation between the United Kingdom and Mexico companies. Launch Currency Rate Type Maintenance to define the conversion rules the companies will use to convert amounts between the peso and pound currencies. Ltd." The UK identifier is the same value you entered within the Epicor Administration Console. You first launch the Epicor Administration Console and create two companies -. 6. Launch External Company Maintenance. 22. You now create an external company record for the United Kingdom company. In this scenario.one for the United Kingdom (UK) location. 4. it also needs an intermediate book for converting currency amounts from the peso to the pound and also converting the accounts from the source book COA structure to the COA structure required in the United Kingdom book. enter "United Kingdom. 8. 9. you first define the two locations as separate companies within your database. These global records are now pulled down into the Mexico company. You then set up a parent-child relationship between the United Kingdom and Mexico. Select the Send GL Accounts check box. You have now processed the inter-company PO.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Functionality in Action 20. Create currency records for both the peso and the pound. Navigate to the United Kingdom company and launch Currency Master Maintenance. Because of this relationship. 7. You also click New on the Standard toolbar and create the new company. You need to set up and run the consolidation process for these companies. Post the invoice. Be sure to select the Global check box on both of these currencies.0. It needs a main book for recording and posting GL transactions using the peso. Navigate to the Multi-Company sheet. Navigate to the Mexico company and link the global currencies and the currency rate type. 1. Selects the packing slip. 3. this pulls the shipping data into the new AR invoice. 5. Be sure to define both currency records as global records.700 199 . 21. Consolidation Scenario Big Parts. this indicates this external company can transfer general ledger account information to your new company. You then complete the AR invoice by selecting the Calculate Taxes check box. 23.700 . Find and select the GL control type and the GL control you will use with this external United Kingdom company. you select the peso option. Click on the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New External Company GL Control. Click on the Retained Earnings sheet to define the standard account used for retained earnings for the Mexico book. 13. Navigate to Consolidation Rate Type Maintenance to create a new consolidate rate type. 17. You now must set up the source and target books within the two companies. Available options: • Daily Average applies an average exchange rate for a consolidated period. Navigate to Consolidation Type Maintenance within the Mexico company and create a consolidation type. 19. • Period End uses the exchange rate from the last day of the consolidated period. You also select a fiscal calendar which is different from the calendar you selected on the Mexico source book. you enter a "UK" value. Select the Currency Rate Type you previously created and then save the record. You save the book and then navigate to the United Kingdom company. select the Allow GJ Allocations to and the Allow AP Allocations to check boxes. You can divide the reported retained earnings balance by substituting a segment in the retained earnings account for a corresponding segment in the in the income statement. 200 Epicor ERP | 10. This option indicates the book records the source financial activity of the current Mexico company. Navigate to the Multi-Company>GL Control>Detail sheet. and Book Currency you need for this book. 16. For this Consolidation Rate type. 12. 14. Consolidation types determine the method used to calculate account balances during consolidations and the consolidation rate type applied to these balances. • None uses the exchange rate currently entered in the Consolidate to Parent Entry program. Navigate to the UK company and repeat these steps to create an external company record for the Mexico location. Calendar. select the Standard option. 18. 22. Navigate to Book Maintenance within the Mexico company and create a new book. The next item you need to create is a consolidation type. For the book currency value. For the Journal Group Prefix. This prefix is automatically placed on any journal groups that process intercompany transactions. You create the standard book you need for this location. save the record. Select the Chart of Accounts. Select the Default Method used to calculate the exchange rate applied during consolidations. The exchange rates used throughout the period are totaled and divided by the number of exchange rates to determine the average exchange rate for the period.0. If the United Kingdom parent company will send general journal and/or accounts payable allocations to the current Mexico company. you select Period End.Multi-Site Functionality in Action Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide 10. 20. 21. select the method used to calculate account balances during consolidations. This record defines the consolidation method which the conversion rules defined on the currency rate type to calculate the currency amounts which display in the intermediate book. selecting the pound as the base currency for this book. In the Calculation Type field. 11. From the Type drop-down list. When you finish creating the new external company record. 15. 31. 30. continuous consolidations occur whenever the multi-company process refreshes data between the two books. use the Book drop-down list and select the intermediate book you created for the consolidation. 29. In the Consolidation Type drop-down list. you select Periodic. you could create this additional book and then add it to the consolidation definition. Save the new record. 28. you save the intermediate book. As a result. Balance Sheet. Target Journal. If you needed more than one book within the Mexico company. Define the Closing Period. This indicates the consolidated journals post to this target book.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Multi-Site Functionality in Action Available methods: • Balance uses year-to-date amounts to determine account balances. Calendar. 27. In the Source Book field. In the Company field.0. For this consolidation. and Book Currency for this intermediate book. 26. You have completed the setup between the parent United Kingdom company and the Mexico company. Select the retained earnings and validations you want for the book. select the consolidation rate type you previously created. 33. Within the Intermediate Book Options group box. 24. This indicates that the book merges balances from the source Mexico book to consolidate the financial results with a target United Kingdom book. When you finish. In the Book field. Navigate to Consolidation Definition Maintenance within the Mexico company and create a new consolidation definition. Intermediate Journal. • Period Movements uses period amounts to determine account balances. select the target United Kingdom company. 34. select whether you want the consolidation to be Periodic or Continuous. You are now ready to run consolidations between the two companies. Tip Notice you can add as many source books as you need for this consolidation definition. 25. Navigate to Book Maintenance within the Mexico company and create a new book. select the target United Kingdom book. Now create the intermediate book. Click the Down Arrow next to the New button and select New Source Book Definition. Click the Type drop-down list and select the Consolidation option.700 201 . Periodic consolidations occur at the end of each fiscal period. You next must define the source Mexico book involved in the consolidation. You next create a record which defines how the source Mexico book interacts with both the intermediate book and the target United Kingdom book. 32. This type of calculation typically applies to monetary balance-sheet accounts. In the Consolidation Rate Type field. Income Statement. You can use this functionality to set up the consolidation relationships you need within the organization. 35. this type of calculation typically applies to non-monetary balance-sheet accounts and income-statements accounts. select the Mexico book used as the source. Use the COA Map ID field to select a map that links accounts in the source Mexico book to an intermediate book. These options all need to be the same as the options defined for the target United Kingdom book. prior-period adjustments affect account balances to which this type applies. Epicor ERP | 10. Define the Chart of Account. and Diff Exchange Account you want this consolidation definition to use and save the record. After you post the last fiscal period for the year. Navigate to the Source Control . you use the Fiscal Year/Suffix field to enter the fiscal year that will contain the period which needs to be consolidated. Create a new consolidation record. 9. 1.700 . launch the Consolidated Year End process. You run this process for each fiscal period. 8. You are now ready to consolidate the financial results to the target book. Because the Mexico book uses a different fiscal year from the United Kingdom book. This process posts the consolidation balances for the previous fiscal year and then creates opening consolidation balances for the next fiscal year. In the Fiscal Period field. You navigate to the Mexico company and launch Consolidate to Parent Entry. Within the Consolidation Post Process program. 7. enter the specific period which will be consolidated.Multi-Site Functionality in Action Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Consolidation Scenario .0. 4.Process You have reached the end of the first fiscal period for the current year. You need to consolidate the books between your United Kingdom and Mexico locations. Click on the Actions menu and select Get Defaults to pull in the current exchange rates available during the consolidation. ID button to find and select the consolidation definition you created previously when you were setting up the consolidation. 2. 6. click Save on the Standard toolbar. Click the Cons Def.Detail sheet. 202 Epicor ERP | 10. 5. Click on the Actions menu and select Post. click Submit. 3. When you finish. The financial results for the quarter from the Mexico company are now both added and posted within the United Kingdom target book. 186 F fiscal calendar create 39 fiscal calendar maintenance 150 fiscal calendars 38 G general ledger account maintenance 151 gl accounts generate 50 gl control maintenance 156 gl control multi-company 55 gl control type maintenance 158 gl controls 54 gl journal codes 53 gl transaction type maintenance 159 gl transaction types 53 glL coa reference type 154 global baq 111 global baqs 112 global business activity queries 22 global currencies 68 global currency rate types 69 global customer credit 13.Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Index Index A account segment values 49. 72 global customer credit setup 72 global customers 65 203 . 79 ap invoice automation setup 79 automatic data translations 34 automatic transaction reversal 109. 187 external company multi-company 27 external system maintenance 18. 182 consolidation definition 104 consolidation definition maintenance 183 consolidation rate type 101 consolidation type 102 cost groups 173 cost rollup 173 cross company baqs 115 cross company business activity queries 22 ctp in a multi-site environment 56 Epicor ERP | 10. 83 consolidated purchasing process 86 consolidated purchasing setup 83 consolidated year end process 108. 180 currencies activate 46 currency accounts 24 currency add 41 currency master maintenance 141 currency rate type 99 currency selection 23 customization across companies 21 D B direct external system verify multi-company 26 baqs 22 book maintenance 125 books 51 books create 52 business activity queries 22 business activity query designer 129 E C central ap invoice payment 80 central ap invoice payment process 81 central ap invoice payment setup 80 central ap invoice payment tracking reporting 82 central ap invoice payment transaction details 82 central ap invoice payments 14 change po suggestions 181 chart of account structure maintenance 135 chart of accounts 46 chart of accounts create 47 chart of accounts mapping 132 chart of accounts master 49 coa category maintenance 137 communication test 33 company database value 36 company rate types 45 company record 37 company record modify 37 company value create 36 configuration in a multi-company enterprise 116 consolidate to parent 106 consolidate to parent entry 182 consolidated purchasing 13. 120 activate status bar options 19 ap allocations 87 ap invoice automation 13.0.700 earliest apply date 40 earliest apply date define 40 earliest apply date entry 147 exchange rate entry 148 exchange rates enter 44 external companies 60 external companies initialize 64 external company 113 external company configuration 18 external company create 60 external company gl control type 54 external company maintenance 18. 198 self-balancing segment maintenance 167 send icpo suggestions 194 site 172. 173.Index global dashboards 111 global dashboards build 112 global data structure 16 global gl accounts 70 global parts 67 global record translations 117 global record translations process 118 global records 13 global records link 65 global reports 111 global reports build 112 global suppliers 66 global table maintenance 19. 95 multi-company consolidation process 106 multi-company consolidation process flow 95 multi-company consolidation setup 97 multi-company consolidation troubleshooting 109 multi-company dashboards 14. 74 inter-company purchase orders process 77 inter-company purchase orders setup 74 inter-company trading 74 intermediate book 103 Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide multi-company journals process 90 multi-company journals setup 89 multi-company log 111 multi-company processes 72. 174. 175 site configuration 55 site cost id 172. 115 multi-company dashboards build 115 multi-company dashboards troubleshooting tools 116 multi-company direct log file 32 multi-company direct server log 116 multi-company direct server process 63. 113. 116 multi-company server log 117 multi-company server process 63. 173 Site cost id create 38 Site cost id maintenance 171 Site cost id select 58 site cost ids 37 site information verify 56 site maintenance 174 source books 98 source external companies 97 startup schedule 30 styling 20 system monitor 110 Epicor ERP | 10. 192 multi-company direct server process schedule 31 multi-company direct server process setup 63 multi-company journal codes 54 multi-company journals 87 multi-company journals and ap allocations 14 rate type create 42 rate type maintenance 165 rounding 25 J 204 S scenario consolidation 199. 192 integrated tables workbench 19 integrated workbench 35 inter-company purchase orders 13.0. 189 global tables 62 global tables define 62 I import consolidation from subsidiary 108 incoming linked po suggestions 191 incoming record errors 118 incoming record errors process 119 integrated table workbench 111.700 . 202 scenario inter-company trading 196. 114. 116 multi-site setup 26 multiple companies 15 multiple currencies 41 multiple sites 15 N new company setup 36 new po suggestions 194 O override rates 24 P journal code maintenance 161 part 173. 193 multi-company server process setup 63 multi-company setup 26 multi-currency 22 multi-site 12 multi-site concepts 12 multi-site management 10 multi-site management license multi-company 26 multi-site processes 72. 174 personalization tips 19 primary components 120 process components 180 M R main menu navigation 16 manage exchange rates 24 monitor data flow 116 multi-company 12 multi-company ap allocations 93 multi-company ap allocations process 94 multi-company ap allocations setup 93 multi-company configurator 14 multi-company consolidation 14. Multi-Site Company Setup Technical Reference Guide Index T U target books 98 target external companies 97 Task Agent Running 32 terms maintenance 124 themes 20 unit of measure 58 unit of measure class create 59 unit of measure create 58 user account 114 V validation errors 33 Epicor ERP | 10.700 205 .0. Additional information is available at the Education and Documentation areas of the EPICweb Customer Portal. you need a Site ID and an EPICweb account. To create an account.epicor. go to http://support.com. To access this site. .